CCI.OS 4.

0
Software for CCI 800 and CCI 1200

Operating instructions
 Contents

About these operating instructions i

About the terminal iii
CCI 1200 iii
CCI 800 iv
CCI.Apps v
Structure vi

1 Safety 1
1.1 Identification of notes in the operating instructions 1
1.2 Intended use 2
1.3 Safety notes 2
1.4 Installation of electrical devices 4

2 Setting up for operation 5

2.1 Check the scope of delivery 5
2.2 Install the terminal 6
2.3 Connect the terminal 7
2.4 Switch on the terminal 7
2.5 Changing layout 8
2.6 Select time zone 9
2.7 Switch on apps 10
2.8 Setting up the user interface 11

3 Graphical user interface 13

3.1 Touch gestures 13
3.2 Help 14
3.3 Layout 15
3.4 Display areas 17
3.4.1 Status bar 18
3.4.2 Standard view 20
3.4.3 App menu 20
3.4.4 Mini view 21
3.5 Special buttons 23
3.6 Notifications 26

4 Settings 27
4.1 User 29
4.2 Apps 31
4.2.1 CCI.Help 32
4.2.2 App management 32
4.2.3 ISOBUS settings 33
4.3 System 42
4.3.1 Setting date and time 44
4.3.2 Updating CCI.OS 46
4.3.3 Updating licence data 52
4.3.4 Connecting to the Internet 53
4.3.5 Connecting to agrirouter 56
5 Display of camera images 62
5.1 Setting up for operation 63
5.1.1 Adjust CCI.Cam 63
5.1.2 Connecting one analogue camera 64
5.1.3 Connecting two analogue cameras 65
5.1.4 Connecting eight analogue cameras 66
5.1.5 Connecting a digital camera 67
5.2 Operation 68
5.2.1 Display image 68
5.2.2 Display two images 68
5.2.3 Mirror image 69
5.2.4 Automatic reversing camera 70
5.2.5 Display an image continuously 72
5.2.6 Event-controlled image switching 72
5.2.7 Change assignment 74
5.2.8 Automatic image switching 75
5.2.9 Showing the image 76
5.2.10 Display next image 77

6 Speed, position and geometry 78

6.1 Adding a tractor 80
6.2 Set up tractor 81
6.2.1 GPS speed 83
6.2.2 Position of the GPS aerial 85
6.2.3 Mounting type 87
6.2.4 Tractor data 89
6.2.5 Power Management 99
6.3 Add implement 100
6.4 Set-up Implement 102
6.4.1 Working width and implement type 104
6.4.2 Mounting type and reference point 105
6.4.3 Section widths: Geometry and delay times 107
6.4.4 Set delay times or correct them 108
6.4.5 Overlap 115
6.4.6 Section control only in the headland 120
6.4.7 Second implement 121
6.5 Set up self-propelled implement 123
6.6 GPS settings 127
6.6.1 Position of the GPS aerial 129
6.6.2 GPS source 130
6.6.3 Adjust GPS receiver 132
6.7 Tilt sensor 133
6.8 CCI.Convert 134
6.9 Tacho 137
6.10 Operation 140
6.10.1 Select tractor 140
6.10.2 Edit tractor 141
6.10.3 Delete tractor 142
6.10.4 Export tractor 142
6.10.5 Select implement 143
6.10.6 Select two implements 144
6.10.7 Edit implement 145
6.10.8 Delete implement 146
6.10.9 Export implement 147
6.10.10 GPS simulation 147
7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control 150
7.1 Setting up for operation 152
7.1.1 Setting the UT number 152
7.1.2 Connecting the AUX control 153
7.1.3 Connecting the implement 154
7.2 Settings 155
7.3 Using the CCI.UT correctly 157
7.3.1 One implement, one terminal 158
7.3.2 Two implements in an alternating manner, one terminal 159
7.3.3 Two implements simultaneously, one terminal 160
7.3.4 Changing the display positions 161
7.3.5 Displaying the implement in maxi view 162
7.3.6 One implement, one AUX control 163
7.3.7 Two implements simultaneously, one AUX control 164
7.3.8 Two implements in alternation, one AUX control 166
7.3.9 No implement operation 167
7.4 Working with an AUX control 167
7.4.1 Assigning implement functions to the auxiliary control AUX 167
7.4.2 Assigning implement terminal functions to the AUX control 171
7.4.3 Delete AUX assignment 175
7.4.4 Delete all AUX assignments 176
7.5 Managing implements 176
7.5.1 Displaying implement details 177
7.5.2 Saved implements 178
7.5.3 Moving an implement to another UT 180

8 Fields and tasks 181

8.1 Setting up for operation 182
8.2 Search, Filter and context menus 184
8.2.1 Search and Filter 184
8.2.2 Context menu 187
8.3 Burger menu 188
8.3.1 Import 189
8.3.2 Export 195
8.3.3 Report 199
8.3.4 Delete 201
8.4 Fields 203
8.4.1 Field list 203
8.4.2 Field detailed view 204
8.5 Customers 207
8.6 Operations 209
8.7 Active task 213
8.7.1 "Task" detailed view 213
8.7.2 Starting a task 214
8.7.3 Add Field 215
8.7.4 Edit field 217
8.7.5 Adding an application map 218
8.7.6 Editing an application map 219
8.7.7 Delete application map 220
8.7.8 Assign implement 220
8.7.9 CCI.Assist 221
8.7.10 Add product 221
8.7.11 Add operation 225
 8.7.12 Add driver 226
8.7.13 Comment 227
8.7.14 AUTOLOG 227
8.8 Field Finder 228

9 Map view 230

9.1 Setting up for operation 232
9.1.1 Setting up Section Control 233
9.1.2 Setting up Parallel Tracking 235
9.1.3 Setting up Auto guidance 236
9.2 Map elements 238
9.2.1 View and operating elements 238
9.2.2 Editing mode 252
9.3 Field boundary 253
9.3.1 Calculate 253
9.3.2 Record 253
9.3.3 Delete 255
9.4 Headland 256
9.4.1 Lock 256
9.4.2 Circumferential headland 256
9.4.3 Record 257
9.4.4 Select 259
9.4.5 Delete 260
9.5 Tracks 261
9.5.1 Select 261
9.5.2 Hide 261
9.5.3 Create 262
9.5.4 Move 266
9.5.5 Rename 268
9.5.6 Change 268
9.5.7 Delete 269
9.6 Markings 269
9.6.1 Add 270
9.6.2 Adding a marking line 271
9.6.3 Move 272
9.6.4 Changing the type 273
9.6.5 Enter comment 274
9.6.6 Delete 274
9.7 Field 275
9.7.1 Delete worked area 275
9.7.2 Save 275
9.7.3 Correct GPS drift 276
9.7.4 Delete 277

10 Miscellaneous 278
10.1 Testing apps 278
10.2 Eject flash drive 280
10.3 Closing Rescue System 281

11 Troubleshooting 283
11.1 Problems during operation 286
 11.2 Remote maintenance and diagnostics 290
11.2.1 Take a screenshot 290
11.2.2 Remote maintenance using Remote View 291
11.2.3 Export log 293
11.2.4 ISOBUS 293
11.3 Messages 294

12 Glossary 335
13 Disposal 342
14 Index 343
A Technical data 346
B Interfaces 347
C Cables 354
D Application maps 361
E GPS receiver 362
F AEF functionalities 364
G Time zones 365
 About these operating instructions
Target These operating instructions are intended for persons who are familiar with
group
using the software CCI.OS 4.0 and its apps on the ISOBUS terminals CCI 800
or CCI 1200. They include all necessary information for safe handling of soft-
ware and terminal.

All information provided in the operating instructions relates to the following

device configuration:

Terminal CCI 800/CCI 1200

Software version CCI.OS 4.0

Hardware version 1.0 and higher

These operating instructions introduce you to operation:

• About the CCI 800/CCI 1200
• Safety
• Setting up for operation
• User interface
• Settings
• Apps
• Troubleshooting
• Technical data, interfaces and cables

Thanks to the detailed index, you can easily find what you want in the instruc-
tions.
The comprehensive glossary explains relevant technical terms; terms that are
explained in the glossary are highlighted in italics.

Liability dis- To ensure fault-free operation of your CCI 800/CCI 1200, please read the op-
claimer
erating instructions carefully. Keep the operating instructions for future refer-
ence.
To prevent problems during use, these operating instructions must be read
and understood prior to assembly and commissioning. No liability is accepted
for damage resulting from failure to observe these operating instructions!

If If you need further information or if problems occur that are not covered in
problems
enough detail in these operating instructions, then please contact your dealer
arise
to obtain the required information.

i / ix
Pictograms Each function is explained with step-by-step instructions. On the left next to
the operation instruction you can see the button to be pressed or one of the
following pictograms:

Enter a value via the keyboard

Enter the value via the terminal’s screen keyboard.

Select a value from a selection

1. Swipe through the selection list until you reach the desired value.
2. Select the value by ticking the checkbox.

Change value
Change a value.
Enter the value via the terminal’s screen keyboard or via a control.

Confirm action
Confirm the action carried out previously.
Press the button "OK" or "Next" or the button with the check mark.

Repeat steps or action

Repeat the preceding steps either in full or in part.

The checkbox or the switch on the right side of a button have the following
functions:
The element is selected
The checkbox is activated:
→ The element is selected.

Function is switched off

The switch at the right edge of the button is in the "off" position:
→ The function or a setting is deactivated.

Function is switched on
The switch at the right edge of the button is in the "On" position:
→ The function or a setting is activated.

If this pictogram is displayed at the edge, the function described can be called
up with an AUX-N control.

ii / ix
About the terminal
The CCI 800 and the CCI 1200 are manufacturer-independent operating ter-
minals for controlling ISOBUS implements.

CCI 1200

The touchscreen
• Is 12.1" in size and has a resolution of
1280x800 pixels,
• Is highly luminous and suitable for day
and night operation and
• has an anti-glare coating, which pre-
vents reflections even in direct sunlight.

• The user interface offers flexible lay-

outs and displays up to 6 apps simulta-
neously.
• Use of a user interface developed
from practical experience, enables an
intuitive approach even with complex
functions.
• The plastic casing reinforced with glass
beads is highly resistant.
• The ON/OFF key as well as two USB
2.0 ports are integrated in the outer
surround to enable quick access.

The interfaces
• Video, GPS, LH5000, WiFi, ISOBUS, sig-
nal connector, USB:
→ the numerous interfaces ensure max-
imum connectivity.
• The buzzer volume signals alarm states
and provides audible feedback.
• All connectors on the back of the termi-
nal are protected against moisture and
dust by rubber caps.

iii / ix
CCI 800
The CCI 800 is more compact than the CCI 1200.

The touchscreen
• Is 8" in size and has a resolution of
1024x600 pixels,
• Is highly luminous and suitable for day
and night operation and
• has an anti-glare coating, which pre-
vents reflections even in direct sunlight.

• The user interface is optimised for op-

eration in landscape,
• Use of a user interface developed
from practical experience, enables an
intuitive approach even with complex
functions.
• The reinforced plastic casing is highly
resistant.

The interfaces
• Video, GPS, LH5000, WiFi, ISOBUS, sig-
nal connector, USB:
→ Numerous interfaces for very good
connectivity.
• The buzzer volume signals alarm states
and provides audible feedback.
• All connectors on the back of the termi-
nal are protected against moisture and
dust by rubber caps.

iv / ix
CCI.Apps
The operating system CCI.OS 4.0 is installed on the CCI 800/CCI 1200 to-
gether with the following apps:
CCI.Cam Display of up to 8 cameras

CCI.Config Implement settings

CCI.Command Map view

CCI.Control Data management

CCI.Help Help system

CCI.UT ISOBUS implement operation

The following functions must be purchased separately and can only be used
once enabled:
Parallel Tracking Creation of tracks

Section Control Automatic switching of sections

Task Control Import and export of data

CCI.Assist Assistant for field work

v / ix
 Structure
CCI 1200
1. 12.1” Touchscreen
2. Light sensor

3. ON/OFF button
4. 2x USB 2.0

5. ISOBUS, supply voltage, ECU-

Power
6. Signal connector, GPS
7. Camera, Video-Multiplexer
8. 2x USB 2.0
9. Ethernet
10. Buzzer

CCI 800
1. 8” Touchscreen
2. Light sensor

3. Ethernet
4. Buzzer
5. ON/OFF button
6. 1x USB 2.0
7. Camera, Video-Multiplexer
8. Signal connector, GPS
9. ISOBUS, supply voltage, ECU-
Power

vi / ix
 Touch- The terminal is operated via the touchscreen. Common touch gestures are
screen
supported.

Light sensor The light sensor measures the ambient light and matches the screen bright-
ness to the ambient light.

ON/OFF Switch the terminal on or off using the ON/OFF button.

To switch on, press the ON/OFF button for 1 second until you hear a signal
tone.

To switch off, press the ON/OFF button for 2 seconds until you hear a sig-
nal tone.

Release the ON/OFF button after the signal tone is emitted.

On some tractors and self-propelled implements, you can also switch the ter-
minal off with the ignition key:

Pull out the ignition key

or

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

The terminal switches back on, when the ignition is turned on again.

NOTE

If the terminal has not been switched on via the ignition, then it is
not possible to switch it on via the ignition.
Switch the terminal off and on via the ignition.

The LED integrated in the ON/OFF button displays the current status infor-
mation. The LED is off during normal terminal operation.
The status displays are described in  Chapter 11.

vii / ix
Nameplate Identify your device based on the information on the nameplate. The name-
plate is attached on the back of the terminal.

1. Manufacturer
2. Terminal type
3. Serial number
4. Hardware version
5. Manufacturer’s article number
6. Production date (week/year)

NOTE

The layout and content of the nameplate on your terminal may differ
from the figure.
The nameplate is attached by the manufacturer.

USB Both USB ports on the left casing side are of type A. Standard flash drives can
(CCI 1200) be connected.

The USB ports on the rear side are type M12. These interfaces protect the ter-
minal against the penetration of dust and water, even when there is a con-
nected USB device.

USB Both USB ports on the terminal rear side are of type A. Standard flash drives
(CCI 800) can be connected. The USB interface is protected against moisture and dust
by a rubber cap.

Buzzer The buzzer is sized so that even if there is a very loud background, terminal
and implement audio warnings can be clearly heard.

viii / ix
Connector At connector A, you connect the terminal
• to the ISOBUS and
• to the power supply.

Atconnector B, you connect the terminal to

• the signal connector,
• an NMEA 0183 GPS receiver,
• the serial GPS output
o of the tractor,
o the self-propelled implement or
o the automatic steering system,
• the serial interface of an N-sensor.

Atconnector C, you connect the terminal to

• a camera or a camera multiplexer,
• an NMEA 0183 GPS receiver,
• the serial GPS output
o of the tractor,
o the self-propelled implement or
o the automatic steering system,
• the serial interface of an N-sensor.

ix / ix
 1 Safety

1 Safety
These operating instructions contain basic instructions which must be ob-
served during setting up, configuration and operation. As such, it is absolutely
essential to read these operating instructions prior to setting-up, configuration
and operation.
Not only do the general safety indications listed in this chapter have to be ob-
served but also the special safety indications appearing in other chapters as
well.

1.1 Identification of notes in the operating instructions

The warning notes in these operating instructions are specially identified:

WARNING - GENERAL HAZARDS!

This warning symbol identifies general warning notes the non-ob-

servance of which poses a danger for life and limb.
Strictly observe the warning notes and take particular care in these cases.

CAUTION!

This caution symbol identifies all warning notes referring to regula-

tions, directives or working procedures which must be observed.
Non-observance can result in damage to or destruction of the terminal as well
as malfunctions.

You can find tips for use in the "Notes":

NOTE

The note symbol highlights important and useful information.

1 / 366
 1 Safety

Further information provides background knowledge:

The Info symbol highlights practical tips and further information.

• The info block makes complex technical connections easier to understand

• The info block provides background information
• The info block gives practical tips

1.2 Intended use

The terminal is intended exclusively for use with approved ISOBUS imple-
ments and devices in agriculture. Any other installation or use of the terminal
is not included within the manufacturer's area of responsibility.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any resulting personal injury or ma-
terial damage. Any risks for unintended use are borne solely by the user.
Observance of the operation and maintenance conditions stipulated by the
manufacturer also form part of intended use.
The accident prevention regulations in force, as well as other generally recog-
nised safety, industrial, medical and traffic laws must be observed. Unauthori-
sed modifications to the device exclude the manufacturer's liability.

1.3 Safety notes

WARNING - GENERAL HAZARDS!

Please take special care to ensure the following safety instructions

are complied with.
Non-compliance could result in malfunctions and consequently danger for any
bystanders.

Switch the terminal off, if any of the following problems occur:

o the touchscreen does not react
o the display hangs
o the user interface is not properly displayed
Ensure that the touchscreen is dry before working with the terminal.
Do not operate the terminal whilst wearing gloves.
Ensure the terminal does not exhibit any external damage.

2 / 366
 1 Safety

BASIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Please also observe the following safety instructions.

If they are not observed, the terminal could be damaged.

Do not remove any safety mechanisms or safety signs.

Do not open the terminal housing. Opening the casing can result in re-
duced terminal service life and malfunctions. If the terminal casing is
opened, the warranty will become void.
Disconnect the power supply to the terminal before carrying out the fol-
lowing work:
o welding work on the tractor and self-propelled implement or on a towed
implement
o maintenance on the tractor and self-propelled implement or on a towed
implement
o use of a charger connected to the battery of the tractor and self-pro-
pelled implement.
Carefully read and observe all safety information in the operating instruc-
tions and the safety labels on the terminal. Safety labels must always be in
a proper legible condition. Replace missing or damaged labels. Ensure that
new terminal parts are provided with the current safety labels. Spare la-
bels can be obtained from your authorised dealer.
Learn how to use the terminal in accordance with regulations.
Keep the terminal and accessories in good condition.
Only use a soft cloth moistened with clean water or a small amount of
glass cleaning agent to clean the terminal.
Do not operate the touchscreen with a sharp-edged or rough object be-
cause otherwise the anti-glare coating will be damaged.
Do not exceed the temperature range of the terminal.
Keep the light sensor clean.
If the terminal is not fitted in the cab, it should be stored in a dry and
clean location. Do not exceed the storage temperature range.
Use only cables that have been approved by the manufacturer.

3 / 366
 1 Safety

1.4 Installation of electrical devices

Modern farming implements use electronic components and parts the opera-
tion of which can be compromised by electro-magnetic interference from
other devices. Such effects can endanger people if the following safety indica-
tions are not observed.
In the event of retrofitting electric and electronic devices, and/or components,
in an implement with connection to the on-board network, the user must in-
dependently verify whether the installation interferes with vehicle electronics
or other components. This is, in particular, applicable to the electronic inter-
ference of:
• EHR
• Front hoisting gear
• Power take-offs
• Engine and gears

It must be ensured in particular that the retrofitted electric and electronic

components comply with the EMC Directive 89/336/EC in its respectively valid
version and that they bear the CE marking.

4 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

2 Setting up for operation

Setting the terminal up for operation is a quick and uncomplicated process
based on the following step-by-step guide.

2.1 Check the scope of delivery

Check the scope of delivery of your terminal before you start setting up for
operation:

1. Terminal
2. Device holder
3. Cable A
4. Quick guide

NOTE

The number and type of accessories may differ between the device
you have purchased and that shown in the figure.
The scope of delivery is defined by the manufacturer.

5 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

2.2 Install the terminal

The device holder is supplied with the terminal and is fitted on the terminal in
the factory. Attach the terminal with the device holder to a 20mm diameter
tube.

Alternatively another device holder can be used, e.g.

• the VESA 75 adapter which is available in the tractor or the self-propelled
implement
• the VESA 75 adapter 2461U from RAM

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the screws on the device holder and do not use
screws that are too long.
Both will lead to damage of the terminal housing and malfunctioning of the
terminal.

Use four M5 x 0.8 hex socket cap screws.

Tighten the screws to 1.5 to 2.0 Nm.
→ This is the maximum tightening torque for the screws.
Use screws with an 8 mm thread length.
→ The length of the internal thread in the terminal housing is 8 mm.
Secure the screws with circlip, groove washer or wave washer to prevent
undoing.

Fit the CCI 1200 in landscape or portrait, the CCI 800 in landscape.

NOTE

The terminal must be correctly installed.

During installation, pay particular attention to the following points:
• Ensuring that the touchscreen is easy to read and operate
• Easy access to the tractor’s or self-propelled implement’s operating ele-
ments
• Unimpeded view of the outside

6 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

2.3 Connect the terminal

Connect the terminal to the ISOBUS and supply it with power via connector A:

Connect cable A to connector A on the terminal.

Connect the "In-cab" coupling of cable A to the In-cab panel connector of

the tractor or the self-propelled implement.

CCI 1200 CCI 800

2.4 Switch on the terminal

CCI 1200 CCI 800

7 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

1. Press the ON/OFF button for 1 second.

→ The terminal starts up.
→ The safety instructions are displayed in English.

2. Press the "Language" button.

→ The "Language" selection list is displayed.

3. Select your language.

→ The checkbox at the right edge of the button is selected.

4. End the process with "Back".

→ The language setting is changed.
→ The safety instructions are displayed in the selected language.

5. Read the safety instructions.

6. Drag the "Enter" button in the indicated direction.

→ The arrow changes its shape to a check mark.
→ The start screen is displayed.

2.5 Changing layout

CCI 1200 As supplied all operating screens are output in landscape format. If you have
installed the CCI 1200 in portrait, then first change the layout:

1. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The "Settings" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the "Layout" button.
→ The "Layout" operating screen is displayed.
3. In the "Orientation" line, select the "Portrait" checkbox.
→ The layout is changed.
4. Press the "Settings" button.
→ The settings are saved.

8 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

2.6 Select time zone

The time zone is the basis for the time displayed by the terminal. Switching
between summer and winter time takes place automatically and cannot be
disabled.

NOTE

An incorrect time zone affects the documenting of tasks and the log.
Select the time zone with the correct time difference and region for your
location.

1. Open the date and time" screen:

2. Press the button "Time zone".

→ The "Time zone" selection list is displayed.

3. Select the Time zone.

→ The checkbox at the right edge of the button is selected.
→ The time zone is changed.

4. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

9 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

2.7 Switch on apps

CCI 1200 On the CCI 1200, all frequently used apps are switched on ex works and can
be used immediately.

Do not change the presetting.

Switch CCI.UT B on, if you want to simultaneously display and operate two
ISOBUS implements in the standard view.

Only switch on the apps agricon, Auto Guidance, SmartConnect and ECU Up-
dater if appropriate hardware is connected.

1. Open the "App management"

screen:

2. Switch CCI.UT B "on".

→ CCI.UT B can be used.

3. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

CCI 800 CCI.UT B is not available on the CCI 800.

10 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

2.8 Setting up the user interface

Example You want to use the terminal for the following purposes:
• Operation of an ISOBUS implement with CCI.UT
• Recording of implement data using CCI.Control
• Display of the camera image while working
Set up the terminal as follows:

CCI 1200 When the CCI 1200 is first started, CCI.Help and CCI.UT A are displayed in the
standard view.
1. Press the button "App Menu".
→ The app menu opens.

2. Press the "CCI.Control" button in the app menu.

→ CCI.Control is displayed in mini view.

3. In mini view, press on "CCI.Control".

→ CCI.Control is displayed in the left half of the standard view.

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for CCI.Cam.

→ CCI.Cam is displayed in mini view.

11 / 366
 2 Setting up for operation

CCI 800 When the CCI 800 is first started, CCI.Help and CCI.UT A are displayed in the
standard view. Only one app can be displayed on the CCI 800 in standard
view.

1. Press the button "App Menu".

→ The app menu opens.

2. Press the "CCI.Control" button in the app menu.

→ CCI.Control is displayed in mini view.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for CCI.Cam.

→ CCI.Cam is displayed in mini view.

12 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3 Graphical user interface

Familiarise yourself with the essential components and the layout of the
screen content.

3.1 Touch gestures

The terminal is operated using the touchscreen alone. The terminal supports
the following common touch gestures:

Press
Press briefly at the indicated point on the touchscreen. You select an item in
a selection list or trigger a function.

Long press
Press for 2 seconds at the indicated point on the touchscreen.

Swipe
Navigate quickly through a selection list.

Drag and drop

Pick up an app and move it to another position on the touchscreen.

Pinch out
Zoom in on the map.

Pinch in
Zoom out on the map.

13 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.2 Help
CCI.Help supports you in your daily work with the terminal.

• CCI.Help answers questions about operation based on practice,

• Gives useful application notes,
• Is available at the touch of a button,
• Is very concise.

Simply pressing the question mark opens the help page relevant for the cur-
rent working step:
• Help in the burger menu provides information about the basic functions of
the apps,
• Help in Settings supports you during configuration.

1. Press the "Help" button.

→ The help subject is displayed.

2. Scroll the help text for other help subjects.

14 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.3 Layout
During daily work with the terminal, you must be able to see all relevant in-
formation and operate several apps simultaneously. Here the terminal sup-
ports you due to the large-sized touchscreen.

CCI 1200 You can configure the user interface flexibly on the CCI 1200. Select the lay-
out suitable for the installation:
Landscape Standard
• The layout most frequently used in practice.
• The terminal is installed in landscape alignment.
• You work with two apps.
• The apps are arranged alongside each other.
• The softkeys for ISOBUS implement operation are
located at the right and left display edge.

Maxi Landscape
• The terminal is installed in landscape alignment.
• You are working with one app.
• The app is displayed magnified.

Portrait Standard
• The terminal is installed in portrait alignment.
• You work with two apps.
• The apps are arranged one below the other.
• The softkeys for ISOBUS implement operation are
located at the right-hand edge.

Maxi Portrait
• The terminal is installed in portrait alignment.
• You work with two apps.
• The apps are arranged one below the other.
• The lower app is displayed magnified.

15 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

CCI 800 The CCI 800 can only be installed in portrait. The app can be operated in
standard view. Other active apps are displayed in mini view.

Landscape Standard
• The layout cannot be changed.
• The terminal is installed in landscape alignment.
• You are working with one app.

Landscape Standard is described below. The descriptions can be applied to the

other layouts.

16 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.4 Display areas

The display is divided into four areas:

CCI 1200 CCI 800

Status bar
The pictograms in the information area of the status bar give an
overview of the connection status and connection quality of the
following interfaces:
1 • GPS
• WiFi
• Internet
• agrirouter
The buttons in the status bar enable quick access to the ISB and
frequently used functions.

Standard view
2 Up to 2 apps are displayed in the standard view. Apps can only be
operated if they are included in the standard view.

App menu
3
You can activate and deactivate apps in the App menu.

Mini view
4 An app in mini view displays relevant information but cannot be
operated.

17 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.4.1 Status bar

Information The symbols in the information area of the status bar give an overview of the
area
connection status and connection quality:
No signal
No GPS receiver is connected or the connected GPS receiver is not set cor-
rectly adjusted.

Adjust the terminal and GPS receiver ( Chapter 6.6).

Invalid signal
The GPS receiver is connected and correctly adjusted. However, the received
position data is invalid. This is generally due to the fact that the number of
satellites that can be contacted is insufficient or you are in a shaded area.

Change your location.

GPS
A GPS receiver is connected. The received position data correspond to the
GPS standard.
→ The documenting of tasks is possible.
→ GPS is not sufficiently accurate for Section Control or Auto Guidance.

DGPS, RTK fix, RTK float

A GPS receiver is connected. The receiving quality corresponds, depending
on the display, to the requirements of DGPS, RTK fix or RTK float.
→ The documenting of tasks is possible.
→ Section Control and Auto Guidance are possible.

J1939
Some tractors make position data available in a manufacturer-specific for-
mat. You can find information on GPS accuracy in the tractor’s technical in-
formation.
→ The documenting of tasks is possible.
→ Section Control is possible.

No WiFi selected
The W10 WiFi adapter is connected to the terminal and the "WiFi" switch in
the "Internet" operating screen is "On". However, no WiFi network is se-
lected and no known WiFi has been found.

Select a WiFi network from the list of WiFi networks ( Chapter 4.3.4).

18 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

WiFi connection is created

The terminal is connected to a WiFi network.

LAN
LAN
The terminal is connected via the "Eth" interface to a network.

No Internet
The terminal is connected to a LAN or WiFi, but has no access to the Inter-
net.

Connect hotspot or router to the Internet.

Connected to the Internet

The terminal is connected to the Internet.

No connection to the agrirouter

The "agrirouter" switch in the "agrirouter" operating screen is "on", but the
terminal cannot connect to agrirouter.

Connect the terminal to the Internet ( Chapter 4.3.4).

Connected to agrirouter
The terminal is connected to agrirouter.
→ The terminal can exchange data with agrirouter.

CCI 800 The status bar of the CCI 800 is split into two parts.

To changeover between the time and information area, press on the status
bar:

19 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.4.2 Standard view

Apps can only be operated if they are included in the standard view.

3.4.3 App menu

The app menu is in collapsed state.

All apps that you have switched on in App management are displayed when
you open the App drop-down menu ( Chapter 4.2.2).
→ In the App menu, you control whether an app is active or inactive.

Active App Inactive app

• Is displayed in the standard view or • Cannot be operated

the mini view • is idle and does not use any CPU
• Can only be operated in standard capacity or RAM
view • Is only displayed in the App menu
• Has a light grey background in the and has a dark grey background
app menu

1. Press the button "App Menu".

→ The app menu opens.

2. Select the app.

→ An active app is deactivated and removed from the mini view or
standard view.
→ An inactive app is activated and displayed in the mini view or stand-
ard view.

20 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

When to deactivate, when to switch off?

If you never use an app, switch it off in app management ( chapter 4.2.2).
→ The app is removed from the app menu.

If you are only temporarily not using an app, deactivate it.

→ The app is available via the app menu and can be activated with just one click.

Example CCI.Cam example you only use CCI.Cam during fertilizer spreading. However,
you will not be using this operation again for several months.

Deactivate CCI.Cam.

3.4.4 Mini view

The following applies for apps in mini view:
• The cannot be used
• They only display the essential information
• They continue running executing functions

Scroll From the fourth activated app, the mini view extends to the right beyond the
visible area:

Swipe the mini view to the left.

→ Apps are moved from the non-visible to the visible area.

NOTE

The swipe direction is dependent on the selected layout.

On the CCI 1200, Mini view is displayed on the left screen edge in the lay-
outs Landscape Maxi, Portrait Standard and Portrait Maxi.
On the CCI 800, the Mini view is displayed on the left screen edge.
Swipe the mini view from the bottom to the top.

21 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

Move To operate an app, move it from the mini view to the standard view:

1. Press and hold the app in mini view and keep the app pressed.
→ The app visibly detaches from the mini view.

2. Move the app into the standard view.

NOTE

When moved, apps continue working without interruption and with-

out a status change.

Rearrange The sequence of apps in the mini view can be changed:

1. Press and hold the app.
→ The app visibly detaches from the mini view.

2. Drag the app to the new position.

22 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.5 Special buttons

Status bar Alongside the information area of the status bar is the ISB and buttons for
calling frequently used functions.
You have the following operating options:

CCI 1200

CCI 800

Take a screenshot
If you are having problems operating the terminal or ISOBUS im-
plement, you can capture a screenshot and send it to your service
partner:
1 1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.
2. Press on the clock until the message "Screenshot saved" is
displayed in the status bar.
→ The screenshot is automatically saved in the root directory
on the flash drive.

Displaying terminal data

You can retrieve detailed information about the terminal's hard-
ware and software.
2
Press and hold the company logo for 2 seconds.
→ Information about the hardware and software version is
displayed.

ISB
Use the ISB, if implement operation is not in the foreground, or if
you want to trigger several implement functions simultaneously.
3
Send the ISB command to all ISOBUS participants:
Press the "ISB" button.
→ The terminal sends the ISB command over the ISOBUS.

23 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

WARNING - GENERAL HAZARDS!

Not all ISOBUS implements support ISB functioning.

Without checking you cannot assume that in hazardous situations certain im-
plement functions will be triggered by the ISB.
Non-compliance could result in malfunctions and consequently danger for any
bystanders.

Refer to the implement operating instructions to determine whether the

implement reacts to the ISB and which implement functions the ISB trig-
gers on the implement.

CCI 1200 You have the following additional operating options on the CCI 1200:

Settings
Make the basic settings before working with the terminal:
4
Press the "Settings" button.
→ The "Settings" operating screen is opened.

Standard/Maxi
Switch between the two layouts Standard and Maxi:
5
Press and hold the "Layout" button for 2 seconds.
→ The new layout is displayed.

App position
Change the position of apps in standard view.
5
Press the "Layout" button.
→ The apps in the Standard view change position.

24 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

Apps For efficient operation, the apps have special buttons:

Action Button
1 The Action Button provides direct access to the functions that are
currently most important.

Burger button
The burger button opens the burger menu. The burger menu of-
2 fers access to the settings, functions and help system of an app:
Press the "burger button".
→ The burger menu is displayed.

Back
Close the burger menu with the "Back" button:
Press the "Back" button in the burger menu.
→ The burger menu is closed and the app operating screen is
displayed.
3
In an app, go back to the previous operating screen by pressing
the "Back" button:
Press the "Back" button.
→ The active operating screen is closed.
→ The previous operating screen is displayed.

App settings
Open the app-specific settings directly from the burger menu:
4
Press the button "App Settings".
→ The "Settings" operating screen of the app is displayed.

25 / 366
 3 Graphical user interface

3.6 Notifications
In the event of a fault or if an operating error exists, a message window is
displayed with an error message. Before you can continue working, you must
rectify the problem and acknowledge the message.
The workflow is interrupted.

After successful action, you receive feedback through messages in the status
bar:
• Display on a blue background in the information area of the status bar
• The workflow is not interrupted because it is not necessary to acknowledge
messages
• Automatic deletion of the message after 10 seconds.

CCI 1200 CCI 800

Sender
The pictogram next to the message indicates who the message
1 sender is:
• Terminal
• ISOBUS implement

Number
2
The number of unread messages is indicated.

Hide messages
Press the "Hide" button.
3 → The message window is closed.
→ All message are deleted.
→ The information area is displayed.

Mark a message as read

Press on the message.
4 → The next message is displayed and the number of unread
messages is decreased by one.
→ After the last message, the message window is closed.

26 / 366
 4 Settings

4 Settings
Adjust the system, the apps and the user preferences in the settings area.
The settings area is used regularly.
→ Therefore, the button for opening the settings area is directly accessible:
CCI 1200 CCI 800

Press the "Settings" button.

→ The "Settings" operating
screen is displayed:

Change the following settings directly in the "Settings" operating screen:

Change screen brightness
Slide the control to the left.
→ The screen becomes darker.
Slide the control to the right.
→ The screen becomes brighter.

27 / 366
 4 Settings

Automatic screen brightness

The light sensor measures the ambient light and matches the display bright-
ness to the ambient light.
1. Switch "Automatic screen brightness" "on".
→ In high ambient light, e.g. direct sunlight, the display brightness is in-
creased.
→ In dim ambient light, e.g. during night-time operation, the display
brightness is reduced.
2. Regulate the behaviour of the light sensor using the slide control.
→ To achieve maximum display brightness, slide the control to the right.
→ To achieve minimum display brightness, slide the control to the left.

The settings are subdivided amongst the areas "User", "Apps", "System",
"Layout" and "Diagnostics":
User
Adjust the operating behaviour of the terminal:
• Sound and touch sound
• Language and units
• User administration

Apps
• Adjust the apps
• Switch on apps
• Activate ISOBUS functions

System
General settings and functions are available in the "System" area:
• Call software and hardware information
• Set date and time
• Restore factory settings
• Install an update
• Create a backup
• Update licence data
• Adjust Internet connection

28 / 366
 4 Settings

Layout
On the CCI 1200, you can change the alignment and layout of the display:
1. Press the "Layout" button.
→ The "Layout" operating screen is displayed.
2. In the "Alignment" line, select landscape or portrait.
→ The orientation is changed.
3. In the "Layout" line, select Standard or Maxi.
→ The layout is changed.
4. End the process with "Back".

Diagnostics
 Chapter 11.2.3

4.1 User
The operating characteristics of the terminal are set under User settings.

Open User settings.

29 / 366
 4 Settings

You have the following setting options:

Volume
The terminal and many ISOBUS implements issue audio warnings. The vol-
ume of the audio warnings can be adjusted:
1. Press the "Volume" button.
→ The "Volume" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the button with the percentage.
→ The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter the volume in %.
4. Confirm the entry.
5. End the process with "Back".

Activate touch sound

Switch "Activate touch sound" "on".
→ Upon pressing a button, you receive audible feedback.

Select language
Select the language in which the text is to be output to the display:
1. Press the "Language" button.
→ The "Language" selection list is displayed.
2. Select a language.
→ The text on the display is shown in the new language.
3. End the process with "Back".

Units
Change the system of units used by the terminal:
1. Press the "Units" button.
→ The "Units" selection list is displayed.
2. Select a system of units.
→ The terminal applies the system of units to all values.
3. End the process with "Back".

30 / 366
 4 Settings

User administration
Ex works, the terminal identifies the following user groups:
• User
• Service
• Developer
The "User" group is preset.
Do not change this setting.

4.2 Apps

Open the app settings.

You have the following operating options:

App settings
Set up the apps.

App management
Switch apps on and off ( Chapter 4.2.2).

ISOBUS settings
Adjust the behaviour of the terminal on the ISOBUS ( Chapter 4.2.3).

31 / 366
 4 Settings

4.2.1 CCI.Help
For some ISOBUS implements, the manufacturer makes a help file available,
that can be imported into the terminal.
→ The help file can only be opened when using the implement.

The manufacturer will make available all other additional information on use,
content and import of the help file.

4.2.2 App management

Non-required apps can be permanently switched off. This has no effect on the
available CPU power or the available RAM.

NOTE

It may occur that an action cannot be performed because an app is

switched off.
We recommend:
• Switch on CCI.UT B if you want to operate two ISOBUS implements
• If necessary, switch on the apps agricon, Auto Guidance, SmartConnect
and ECU Updater
• Always switch on all other apps

Switch an app off as follows:

1. Open App management:

32 / 366
 4 Settings

2. Switch the app "off".

→ Message window 31002 is displayed.

3. Confirm the entry.

→ The app is ended.
→ The app is no longer displayed in the app menu.

To switch an app on proceed as described above. Set the switch next to the
app name to "on".

4.2.3 ISOBUS settings

The terminal makes the following functions available on the ISOBUS:
• Universal Terminal
• AUX-N Terminal Functions
• Task Controller
• TECU
• File Server
All ISOBUS functions are activated ex works.

NOTE

We recommend leaving all ISOBUS functions activated.

Only then can you take full advantage of the wide range of terminal func-
tions:
• ISOBUS implement operation
• Recording of task data
• Section Control and Rate Control.

33 / 366
 4 Settings

Example If you operate two ISOBUS terminals simultaneously, you can distribute the
functions over both terminals:
• You operate the ISOBUS implements via the fixed ISOBUS terminal inte-
grated in the tractor
• You use the CCI 800/CCI 1200 for Section Control.

1. In the ISOBUS settings on the CCI 800/CCI 1200, switch the "Universal Ter-
minal" off and the "Task Controller" on.
2. In App management on the CCI 800/CCI 1200, switch CCI.UT A off and
CCI.Command on.

Adjust the behaviour of the terminal on the ISOBUS as follows:

Open the ISOBUS settings.

34 / 366
 4 Settings

Universal If the ISOBUS function "Universal terminal" is activated, the following applies:
Terminal
• 10 implements can connect with each of CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B
• You can operation one implement with each of CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B
This is also possible, if you simultaneously use a second ISOBUS terminal.

1. The ISOBUS function "Universal terminal" is activated ex works.

→ The terminal logs on to the ISOBUS as a "Universal Terminal".

2. Change to the operating screen "App settings".

3. Press the button "App management".

→ The "App management" operating screen is displayed.

4. Switch CCI.UT A "on".

→ CCI.UT A is displayed in the standard view.

You do not want to operate any ISOBUS implement with the terminal.

Switch "Universal Terminal" and the apps CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B off:
1. In the "ISOBUS settings" operating screen switch the "Universal Termi-
nal" "off".
→ Message window 31007 is displayed.

2. Confirm the entry.

→ The "Universal Terminal" switch is "off".
→ The terminal is no longer logged on to the ISOBUS as a "Universal
Terminal".
→ The terminal can no longer be used to operate an ISOBUS implement.

3. Change to the operating screen "App settings".

4. Press the button "App management".

→ The "App management" operating screen is displayed.

5. Switch CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B "off".

→ CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B are no longer displayed in the app menu.

35 / 366
 4 Settings

NOTE

Without the ISOBUS function "Universal Terminal" the terminal no

longer logs in to the ISOBUS as a UT.
The terminal can no longer be used to operate an ISOBUS implement.
Only switch the ISOBUS function "Universal Terminal" off if you want to
operate the terminal without an ISOBUS implement.

AUX-N Ter- Some frequently used terminal functions can also be called with an AUX con-
minal Func-
trol.( Chapter 7.4.2)
tions

NOTE

Terminal functions can only be called with an AUX-N type AUX con-
trol.
Check the data sheet of the AUX control to determine whether it is of
type AUX N.

The ISOBUS function "AUX-N Terminal Functions" is activated ex works.

→ The terminal registers its AUX-N Terminal Functions with the ISOBUS.
→ You can assign terminal functions to the operating elements of the AUX
control.

If you do not want to operate the terminal with the AUX control, switch off
AUX-N terminal functions.

1. Switch "AUX-N Terminal Functions" off.

→ Message window 31010 is displayed.

2. Confirm the entry.

→ The switch "AUX-N Terminal Functions" is off.
→ The terminal no longer registers its AUX-N Terminal Functions with
the ISOBUS.

36 / 366
 4 Settings

Task CCI.Assist, Section Control, Rate Control, Tramline Control and the documen-
Controller
tation of tasks only function if the ISOBUS implement is connected to the ter-
minal's Task Controller:
→ CCI.Config, CCI.Control and CCI.Command exchange data with the ISOBUS
implement.

Switch the ISOBUS function "Task Controller" on.

Set the Task Controller number at the terminal and in the ISOBUS imple-
ment.

1. The ISOBUS function "Task Controller" is activated ex works.

→ The terminal logs on to the ISOBUS as a "Task Controller".
→ Ex works, the Task Controller has Task Controller number "1".

2. Change to the operating screen "App settings".

3. Press the button "App management".

→ The "App management" operating screen is displayed.

4. Switch CCI.Control "on".

→ CCI.Control is displayed in the app menu.

5. Switch CCI.Command "on".

→ CCI.Command is displayed in the app menu.

37 / 366
 4 Settings

Task The Task Controller number must be set in order that the ISOBUS implement
Controller
can connect to the Task Controller of the terminal.
Number

An ISOBUS implement can only connect to one Task Controller; it selects this
Task Controller using the Task Controller number.
There are two options here:
1. The same Task Controller number is set in the ISOBUS implement and the
terminal:
→ The implement connects to the terminal’s Task Controller.

2. No Task Controller number is set in the implement (or no number can be

set):
→ The implement connects to the Task Controller with the lowest Task
Controller number.

NOTE

Use of two Task Controllers

You want to use the Task Controller of CCI 800/CCI 1200 and the Task Con-
troller of another ISOBUS terminal:
→ Each Task Controller must have a unique Task Controller number because
otherwise address conflicts will occur on the ISOBUS.

Allocate the lowest Task Controller number to the Task Controller with
which the implement is to connect.

38 / 366
 4 Settings

1. Press the button "Task Controller number".

→ The input dialogue is displayed.

2. Press the input field with the number.

→ The screen keyboard is displayed.

3. Enter the Task Controller number.

4. Confirm the entry.

5. End the process with "Back".

→ Message window 31006 is displayed.

6. Confirm the entry.

If you use the Task Controller of another ISOBUS terminal, proceed as fol-
lows:

1. Switch "Task Controller" "off".

→ Message window 31005 is displayed.

2. Confirm the entry.

→ The "Task Controller" switch is "off".
→ The terminal is no longer logged in to the ISOBUS as a "Task Control-
ler".

3. Change to the operating screen "App settings".

4. Press the button "App management".

→ The "App management" operating screen is displayed.

5. Switch CCI.Control "off".

→ CCI.Control is no longer displayed in the app menu.

6. Switch CCI.Command "off".

→ CCI.Command is displayed in the app menu.

39 / 366
 4 Settings

TECU The ISOBUS "TECU" function sends the speed, the PTO speed and the position
of the rear 3-point hitch to the ISOBUS implement.

The "TECU" ISOBUS function is activated ex works.

→ The terminal logs on to the ISOBUS as "TECU".

If the TECU of the tractor indicates an error message, switch the TECU of the
CCI 800/CCI 1200 off.

1. Switch the "TECU" "off".

→ Message window 31004 is displayed.

2. Confirm the entry.

→ The "TECU" switch is "off".
→ The terminal is no longer logged on to the ISOBUS as "TECU".

NOTE

If the TECU is switched off, the terminal does not read out from the
tractor’s signal connector.
If you switch off the "TECU" ISOBUS function, the following functions are de-
activated in the tractor settings:
• The signal connector
• Wheel and ground speed in the GPS speed output

Only switch the "TECU" ISOBUS function off, if the tractor TECU displays
an error message.

40 / 366
 4 Settings

File Server The file server makes storage available to all ISOBUS participants. Thus, for
example, an ISOBUS implement can save and read out configuration data on
the terminal.

The "File server" ISOBUS function is activated ex works.

→ The terminal logs on to the ISOBUS as "File server".

Only switch the file server off when you are sure that no ISOBUS implement is
using this function.

1. Switch the "File server" "off".

→ Message window 31008 is displayed.

2. Confirm the entry.

→ The "File server" switch is "off".
→ The terminal is no longer logged on to the ISOBUS as "File server".

41 / 366
 4 Settings

4.3 System

Open the system settings.

You have the following operating options:

Terminal data
In terminal data, the version of the installed software and the serial number
of the terminal are displayed together with other data. The terminal data is
only required for service cases of interest:
1. Press the "Terminal data" button.
→ The terminal data is displayed.
2. End the process with "Back".

Date and time

 Chapter 4.3.1

42 / 366
 4 Settings

Restore factory settings

You delete the user settings of all apps.
Tractors, implements, tasks and fields will not be deleted.
1. Press the "Reset factory settings" button.
→ Message window 31001 is displayed.
2. Confirm the entry.
→ The factory settings are restored.

Delete database
You will delete all tractors, implements, fields and tasks, including all mas-
ter data, totals and location-based data.

CCI.OS-Update
Update the terminal software CCI.OS ( Chapter 4.3.2).

Licence data
Enable apps on the terminal ( Chapter 4.3.3).

Internet
Connect the terminal to the Internet ( Chapter 4.3.4).

agrirouter
Exchange data with the agrirouter ( Chapter 4.3.5).

Remote View
Remote maintenance of the terminal ( Chapter 11.2.2).

43 / 366
 4 Settings

4.3.1 Setting date and time

NOTE

The time cannot and must not be set manually.

The terminal clock is very accurate and is set in the factory. With an active
Internet connection, the terminal adjusts the time based on a time server.

Open the "date and time" screen.

44 / 366
 4 Settings

You have the following setting options:

Select time zone
Select the time zone with the correct time difference and the appropriate re-
gion:
1. Press the button "Time zone".
→ The "Time zone" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the Time zone.
→ The checkbox at the right edge of the button is selected.
→ The time zone is changed.

Select time format

1. Press the "Time format" button.
→ The "Time format" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the format.
→ The checkbox at the right edge of the button is selected.
→ The time format is changed.

Select date format

1. Press the "Date format" button.
→ The "Date format" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the format.
→ The checkbox at the right edge of the button is selected.
→ The date format is changed.

NOTE

We recommend adherence to the factory settings for time and date

formats.

Time and date format are used as follows:

• Display of time and date on the terminal
• Formatting of the time stamp that the terminal sends over the ISOBUS

45 / 366
 4 Settings

4.3.2 Updating CCI.OS

The terminal software CCI.OS is constantly subject to further development
and new functions are continuously being added. Your service partner will
make new updates available to you as CCI.OS updates.

CAUTION!

The connection to the ISOBUS is disconnected during installation of

an update.
→ The implements connected to the ISOBUS can no longer be operated.

NOTE

Occasionally the update of CCI.OS may fail.

Then the terminal can only be started in the Rescue System.
Create a backup, before you update CCI.OS.

Update vs.
Rollback In an update, a terminal software CCI.OS versions is installed that is newer
than the version installed on the terminal.
In a rollback the terminal software CCI.OS is rolled back to a previous ver-
sion.
• The "Updater" operating screen can only be used to install updates.
• Rollbacks are carried out in the Rescue System.
→ A previously created backup is restored.

CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the update process for any reason.

The terminal restarts several times during the course of the update. The up-
date is only complete once message window 34991 is displayed.
Do not switch off the terminal and do not disconnect the terminal from the
power supply.
Do not pull out the flash drive when updating over the USB bus.

Non-observance can result in damage to or destruction of the terminal as well

as malfunctions.

46 / 366
 4 Settings

Open the "Updater" screen.

Update via If you want to install the update from a flash drive, proceed as follows:
the flash
drive
1. Copy the update to the root directory of the flash drive.

2. Connect the flash drive to the terminal.

3. Press the button "CCI.OS-Update via flash drive".

→ The selection list with the available Updates is displayed.

4. Select an update.

5. Press the "Update CCI.OS" button.

→ Message window 34004 is displayed.

6. Start the update with "OK".

→ The new terminal software is installed.
→ The terminal automatically restarts several times.
→ The update is only complete once message window 34991 is dis-
played.

7. Confirm the message with "OK".

→ The new CCI.OS has been installed.
→ The terminal can be used again.

NOTE

The installation program saves data on the flash drive for the dura-
tion of the update.
Use a flash drive with free space of at least 200 MB.

47 / 366
 4 Settings

Update via If the terminal is connected to the Internet, an automatic check is performed
Internet
to see whether an update of the terminal software CCI.OS is available.

Connect the terminal to the Internet ( Chapter 4.3.4).

→ If an update is available, message window 34986 (or 34987) is dis-
played.

If you want to install the update, proceed as follows:

1. Confirm the message with "OK".

→ The selection list with the available Updates is displayed.

2. Select an update.

3. Press the "Download" button.

→ Message window 34017 is displayed.

4. Confirm the message with "OK".

→ The update is downloaded.
→ The terminal cannot be used during the download.
→ Message window 34989 is displayed.

5. Start the update with "OK".

→ The new terminal software is installed.
→ The terminal automatically restarts several times.
→ The update is only complete once message window 34991 is dis-
played.

6. Confirm the message with "OK".

→ The new CCI.OS has been installed.
→ The terminal can be used again.

48 / 366
 4 Settings

You can install the update at a later time.

The following two options are available:

Option 1 You want to download and install the update later:

1. Confirm the message 34986 (34987) with "Cancel".
→ The update is not downloaded.

Download and install the update as follows:

2. Connect the terminal to the Internet ( Chapter 4.3.4).
3. In the "Updater" operating screen press the button "CCI.OS-Update via In-
ternet".
→ The selection list with the available Updates is displayed.

4. Perform steps 2 to 6 as described above.

Option 2 You want to download the update now, but install it later:
1. Confirm the message 34986 (34987) with "OK".
2. Perform steps 1 to 3 as described above.
→ The update is downloaded.
→ Message window 34017 is displayed.

3. Press the "Cancel" button.

→ The update is saved on the terminal, but not installed.

Install the saved update as follows:

4. In the "Updater" operating screen press the button "CCI.OS-Update via In-
ternet".
5. Press the "Update" button.
→ The new terminal software is installed.
→ The terminal automatically restarts several times.
→ The update is only complete once message window 34991 is displayed.

6. Confirm the message with "OK".

→ The new CCI.OS has been installed.
→ The terminal can be used again.

49 / 366
 4 Settings

Create You can completely restore the terminal with a backup , e.g. if a problem has
backup
occurred during a CCI.OS update.
Create a backup, once you have completely set up the terminal. We also rec-
ommend a backup prior to each CCI.OS update.

A backup contains the following:

• CCI.OS and all installed CCI.Apps
• The user settings
• Tasks and master data

CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the backup for any reason.

Do not pull out the flash drive.
Do not switch off the terminal and do not disconnect the terminal from the
power supply.
Wait until the button "Restart terminal" is activated.

Non-observance can result in damage to the terminal.

CAUTION!

The connection to the ISOBUS is disconnected during the backup.

→ The implements connected to the ISOBUS can no longer be operated.

50 / 366
 4 Settings

1. Connect a flash drive with at least 1 GB of free space to the terminal.

2. Press the "Create backup" button.
→ Message window 34005 is displayed.
3. Start the backup with "OK".
→ The backup is saved in the directory \CCI_OS_BACKUP on the flash
drive.
→ The button "Restart terminal" is activated after creation of the
backup.
4. Press the button "Restart terminal".
→ The terminal is restarting.

You restore the old version from a backup in the Rescue System.

You have the following advanced operating options:

Rescue System
Updating of the Rescue System can only be performed by the manufacturer
or its sales and service partners.

51 / 366
 4 Settings

4.3.3 Updating licence data

The terminal licence data must be updated under the following circumstances:
• Following a CCI.OS update
• After acquisition of the licence for a paid-for function (e.g. Section Control,
Parallel Tracking or CCI.Assist)

Open the "Licence data" screen.

You have the following operating options:

Update the licence data via a flash drive
A quick and reliable update method. Use this function if you have access to
a PC with an Internet connection:
1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.
2. Press the button "USB".
→ The "Save TAN" operating screen is displayed.
3. Press the "Next" button.
→ The file <serial number>.UT.liz is saved to the flash drive.
→ The operating screen "Connect flash drive" is displayed.
4. Connect the flash drive to your PC.
5. On the PC open the web page https://mycci.cc-isobus.com/pa
6. Change to the "USB" tab and follow the instructions.
→ The new licence data is saved on the flash drive.
7. Connect the flash drive to the terminal.
→ The licence data is automatically updated.
→ The "Licence data" operating screen is displayed.

52 / 366
 4 Settings

Update the licence data via the Internet

The fastest and easiest update method. Use this function, if the terminal is
connected to the Internet:
1. Press the "Internet" button.
→ The licence data is updated.
→ The "Licence data" operating screen is displayed.

4.3.4 Connecting to the Internet

The updating of the licence data can be performed quickly and easily via the
Internet. You also require an active Internet connection for exchanging data
with agrirouter.

Connect the terminal to the Internet via WiFi.

→ For example, you can create the WiFi connection by using your phone as a
hotspot.
→ So that the terminal can connect to the WiFi, you need the W10 WiFi
adapter.

Open the "Internet" screen.

53 / 366
 4 Settings

Status
The information area is displayed at the top edge of
the "Internet" operating screen:
1: Status of the terminal connection/local area net-
work
→ Green: OK
→ Red: no connection
2: Status of the connection/local area network/Inter-
net
→ Green: OK
→ Red: no connection
3: MAC address of the WiFi interface
4: WiFi IP address of the terminal
5: MAC address of the LAN interface
6: LAN IP address of the terminal

A overview of the connection status and the connec-

tion quality are given by the symbols in the status bar
information area:
1: Connection to WiFi
→ Connected/not connected
→ Connection quality
2: Connection with the Internet
→ Connected/not connected

54 / 366
 4 Settings

You have the following operating options:

Connect via WiFi
Use the W10 WiFi adapter to allow the terminal to connect to the Internet:
1. Connect the W10 WiFi adapter to the USB port.
2. Press the "WiFi" button.
→ The "WiFi networks" selection list is displayed.
3. Select a WiFi network.
→ The window for password entry is displayed.
4. Enter the WiFi password and confirm the entry.
→ The terminal connects using WiFi.
→ The connection to WiFi and Internet was successful, if two green
checkmarks and the IP address of the terminal are displayed in the
information area.
→ The symbols in the status bar indicate the status and quality of the
connection.

WiFi pass- Correct an incorrectly entered WiFi password as follows:

word
1. In the selection list "WiFi networks", press the button with the WiFi net-
work and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

2. Select "Edit".
→ The window for password entry is displayed.

3. Correct the password.

4. Confirm the entry.

55 / 366
 4 Settings

4.3.5 Connecting to agrirouter

agrirouter is a data exchange platform, via which you can send and receive
data. You can find more information on the Internet on the website
https://www.my-agrirouter.com.

Prior prepa- You require the Task Control licence ( Chapter 4.3.3).
ration
Under my agrirouter set up an agrirouter user account.

Create the terminal in the agrirouter user account.

Note the registration code for the terminal.

Connect the terminal to the Internet. ( Chapter 4.3.4)

56 / 366
 4 Settings

Setting up
for opera- 1. Open the "agrirouter" screen:
tion

a: Information area
b: Switch on the agrirouter
c: Receive and send data
d: Manage accounts

2. Press the "Account management" button (d).

→ The "Account management" operating screen is displayed.

3. Press the "+ New account" button.

4. Enter the account name.

 The account name can be freely selected.

5. Confirm the entry.

→ The "Account management" operating screen is displayed.
→ The new account is selected.

6. Press "Back" to return to the "agrirouter" operating screen.

7. Press the "Registration Code" button.

→ An input dialogue is displayed.

8. Enter the registration code of the terminal. The code is case-sensitive.

Confirm the entry.
→ The "agrirouter" button can be pressed now.

9. Switch the "agrirouter" "on" (b).

→ An active connection is displayed in the information area.
→ agrirouter set-up is completed.

57 / 366
 4 Settings

Setting In the "agrirouter" operating screen you have the following operating options:
agrirouter on/off

Switch "agrirouter" "on".

→ The terminal connects to agrirouter.

Telemetry on/off
If an ISOBUS implement with TC Client is connected to the ISOBUS, the
terminal sends the position, implement and process data to agrirouter every
30 seconds.

Switch "Telemetry" "on".

→ The terminal sends the data of the connected implements to agri-
router.

 If the implement does not have a TC client or does not make telemetry
data available, the terminal sends the position data.
 Depending on the implement, telemetry data is recorded and sent in
large quantities. Therefore, only use the function if you actually want to
send telemetry data to receivers.
 If the connection to the agrirouter is interrupted, all data is buffered and
then sent after the connection is remade.

Inbox
The inbox contains all data downloaded from the agrirouter. The data are
sorted by sender.

Received task data is offered for import in CCI.Control.

Data remain in the inbox even after further processing in other apps and
must be manually deleted. Delete one record or all data:
1. Press the "Inbox" button.
→ The "Inbox"" selection list is displayed.
2. Press the button with the record and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.
3. Select "Delete" or "Delete all".
→ The record is deleted or all data is deleted.
→ The "Inbox"" selection list is displayed.

58 / 366
 4 Settings

Outbox
Tasks, shape files and other data can be sent from the terminal using agri-
router. The outbox contains all data for which send has failed.

Data in the outbox must be sent manually:

1. Press the "Outbox" button.
→ The "Outbox" selection list is displayed.
2. Press the button with the record and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.
3. Select "Upload".
→ The record is sent.
→ The "Outbox" selection list is displayed.

To free up storage, delete no longer required data from the outbox:

1. Press the "Outbox" button.
→ The "Outbox" selection list is displayed.
2. Press the button with the record and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.
3. Select "Delete" or "Delete all".
→ The record is deleted or all data is deleted.
→ The "Outbox" selection list is displayed.

59 / 366
 4 Settings

Account management
Create an account on the terminal for each agrirouter user account that you
want to use to connect the terminal.

Adding an account:
1. Press the "Account management" button.
→ The empty account list is displayed.
2. Press the "+ New account" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
3. Enter the account name and confirm the entry.
 The account name can be freely selected.
→ The account is displayed in the account list.
→ The account is selected.
4. To link the account with an agrirouter user account, enter the registra-
tion code ( Registration code).

Selecting an account:
1. Press the "Account management" button.
→ The account list is displayed.
2. Select an account.
→ The terminal logs on to the agrirouter user account, with which you
have linked the account ( Registration code).
3. End the process with "Back".
→ The selected account is displayed on the "Account management" but-
ton.

Modifying an account:
1. Press the "Account management" button.
→ The account list is displayed.
2. Press the button with the account name and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.
3. Select "Edit".
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
4. Enter the account name and confirm the entry.
→ The account is displayed in the account list.

60 / 366
 4 Settings

Deleting an account:
1. Press the "Account management" button.
→ The account list is displayed.
2. Press the button with the account name and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.
3. Select "Delete".
→ The account is deleted.

Registration code
You link an account on the terminal with an agrirouter user account, by en-
tering a registration code once.

You receive the registration code in the agrirouter user account:

1. On the PC, open the website my-agrirouter.com and log in with your
user data.
2. Create the terminal in the user account.
→ The registration code is created.

Enter the registration code at the terminal as follows:

1. Press the "Registration Code" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the registration code and confirm the entry.
→ The "agrirouter" operating screen is displayed.
→ You can see in the information area whether the terminal was able to
log on to the agrirouter user account.

61 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5 Display of camera images

This chapter introduces you to the following topics:
• Display camera image
• Connect the analogue cameras to the terminal
• Connect the digital camera to the terminal
• Set up and start automatic image switching
• Automatic reversing camera

Introduc- CCI.Cam is used to display camera images.

tion
Maintain an overview of your implement and complex work processes with up
to eight cameras. Automatic image switching makes manual switching be-
tween camera screens unnecessary.
Open CCI.Cam in standard view or mini view. In this way you can see the
camera image at all times:

The CCI 1200 allows you to display the camera images from two digital cam-
eras, one in standard view and one in mini view.

If other apps are displayed in standard and mini view, you can display the
camera image using an AUX control.

CAUTION!

No combined operation of analogue and digital cameras.

Simultaneous use of analogue and digital cameras is not possible.
→ If analogue and digital cameras are connected to the terminal, only the
digital cameras are displayed.
Connect either analogue or digital cameras to the terminal.

62 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.1 Setting up for operation

Prior prepa-
ration
In app management switch CCI.CAM "on" ( Chapter 4.2.2).

Activate CC.CAM in the App menu ( Chapter 3.4.3).

5.1.1 Adjust CCI.Cam

The following settings are suitable for most operating modes:

1. Open the CCI.Cam settings:

2. Switch the "Video-Miniplexer" "off".

3. Press the "Reversing camera" button.

→ The "Reverse gear detection" selection list is displayed.

4. Select "Off".

5. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

6. Open CCI.Cam in standard view.

→ The camera image of the camera is displayed.

7. Press centrally on the camera screen.

→ The burger button is displayed:

8. Open the burger menu.

63 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

9. Switch the "event" "off".

→ Event-controlled image switching is deactivated.

10. Switch "Time" "off".

→ Automatic image switching is deactivated.

11. Press the "Back" button.

→ The camera image is displayed.

Any necessary changes to these settings are indicated at the corresponding

points in the operating instructions.

5.1.2 Connecting one analogue camera

You can connect one analogue camera directly to the terminal. You require
the Cable C:
1. Connect Cable C to connector C of the terminal.
2. Connect the camera to Cable C.
→ The camera is automatically recognised by the terminal.
→ The camera is designated "1".

NOTE

Cable C is available in variants C1 and C2.

Use cable C1 for a camera with AEF Video coupling.
Use cable C2 for a camera with an M12 connector.

64 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.1.3 Connecting two analogue cameras

To connect two analogue cameras to the terminal, you require a Video-Mini-
plexer.

The Video-Miniplexer is supplied with power from the terminal.

1. Connect the cameras at the Video-Miniplexer.
2. Connect Cable C2 to connector C of the terminal.
3. Plug the M12 coupling "M12 Video" (cable C2) into the panel connector
"Out" on the Video-Miniplexer.
→ The camera at connection 1 of the miniplexer is assigned camera num-
ber "1" in the terminal; the second camera receives "2".

A Video-Miniplexer connected to the terminal is not automatically detected.

Adjust CCI.Cam as follows:
1. Open the CCI.Cam settings:

2. Switch the "Video-Miniplexer" "on".

→ The Video-Miniplexer is activated.

3. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

4. Open CCI.Cam in standard view.

→ The camera image of camera 1 is displayed.

65 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.1.4 Connecting eight analogue cameras

You can connect up to eight analogue cameras to the terminal using the
Video-Multiplexer.

The Video-Multiplexer is supplied with power from the terminal or an external

power supply.
1. Connect the cameras at the Video-Multiplexer.
2. Connect Cable C2 to connector C of the terminal.
3. Plug the M12-coupling "M12 Video" (cable C2) into the socket "MON1" on
the Video-Multiplexer.
→ The video-multiplexer is automatically recognised by the terminal.
→ The cameras at connections 1 to 8 of the multiplexer are assigned cam-
era numbers "1" to "8" in the terminal.

CAUTION!

If you connect more than 3 cameras to the Video-Multiplexer, you will

overload the power output of the terminal.
Overloading of the power output will result in damage to the terminal.

Use an external power source.

Connect an external power source to the panel connector "P1" on the
Video-Multiplexer.

66 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

Select the assignment of the cameras to the 8 connections so that when

scrolling through the camera images, the sequence makes sense to you.

You can use an AUX-N control to display the 8 camera images in sequence (Chap-
ter 5.2.10):
→ The "View Next Image" terminal function displays the images in the order in which
the cameras are connected to the multiplexer.

Alternatively, you can activate the "Automatic screen change" function

( Chapter 5.2.8):
→ The display changes automatically and in any sequence between camera images,
displaying the images for any duration.

NOTE

Unassigned multiplexer connections output a black camera image.

5.1.5 Connecting a digital camera

You can connect up to eight digital cameras to the terminal, for which the
camera numbers "A" to "H" are reserved.

Connect the terminal to the local area network of the tractor or self-pro-
pelled implement via the Ethernet interface (Eth connector).
→ All compatible digital cameras in the network are automatically detected
and numbered.

NOTE

Digital cameras are automatically numbered.

A camera added to the network is assigned the next free number "A" to "H";
the IP address or location plays no role in the assignment.
The assignment is saved.
→ The camera retains its number if the terminal is switched off and then
back on again.
You can change the numbering ( Chapter 5.2.7).

67 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

NOTE

Use only compatible cameras.

The interface for digital cameras complies with standard ISO 17215.
Only connect digital cameras that also comply with ISO 17215 to the ter-
minal.

You can obtain a list of compatible cameras from your dealer or service part-
ner.

NOTE

No combined operation of analogue and digital cameras.

If you have connected analogue and digital cameras to the terminal, only the
digital cameras are displayed.

See the manufacturer’s instruction manual for information on connection and

operation of the digital cameras.

5.2 Operation
CCI.Cam can only be operated in Standard View.

5.2.1 Display image

The camera image is displayed in standard view or mini view.

5.2.2 Display two images

The camera images from two digital cameras can be displayed simultaneously
using the CCI 1200 - hardware version 2.0 or higher.

1. Open CCI.Cam in standard view.

→ Camera image 1 is displayed in standard view.

2. Activate CAM 2 in the app menu.

→ Camera image 2 is displayed in mini view.

If you deactivate CAM 2 in the app menu, the camera image is closed in mini
view.
If you deactivate CAM 1 in the app menu, both camera images are closed.

68 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.2.3 Mirror image

The camera image is mirrored along the vertical axis.
Mirroring of the camera image is, for example, useful for reversing cameras:

1. Press centrally on the camera screen.

→ The burger button is displayed.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Switch "Mirror" "on".

→ The camera image is mirrored.

To redisplay the camera image in normal view, switch "Mirror" off.

NOTE

The "Mirror" switch only affects the currently visible camera image.

69 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.2.4 Automatic reversing camera

The reversing camera is an optical manoeuvring aid for reversing.
You can use the following cameras as a reversing camera:
• An analogue camera connected to the Video-Miniplexer
• An analogue camera connected to the Video- Multiplexer
• A digital camera

Prerequisite is that the tractor or self-propelled implement send the direction

of travel signal over the ISOBUS. Only in this way can the terminal detect the
change in the direction of travel.

1. Open the "Reverse gear detec-

tion" selection list:

2. Select "Tractor".

3. Confirm the selection with "Back".

→ The CCI.Cam settings are displayed.

4. Press the "Camera number" button.

→ The "Reversing camera" selection list is displayed.

5. Select the camera to be used as the reversing camera.

6. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

70 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

The camera image of the reversing camera is only displayed for the duration
of reversing. It is displayed in the foreground and covers the standard view:
→ All other apps cannot be operated for the duration of the camera image
display.

NOTE

Not all tractors or self-propelled implements make a direction of

travel signal available on the ISOBUS.
→ The automatic reversing camera cannot be used without a direction of
travel signal.
Select "off" in step 5.

WARNING - GENERAL HAZARDS!

The reversing camera is only an aid and displays possible obstacles

with a distorted perspective, incorrectly or not at all.
The reversing camera is not a replacement for your concentration.
The reversing camera does not warn you of a collision, persons or ob-
jects.
Under certain circumstances it cannot identify people or objects and continued
driving will injure people or damage objects, the tractor or the self-propelled
implement.

→ You are always responsible for safety.

→ Moreover, you must continue to be aware of your immediate surroundings
when manoeuvring. This applies not only to the area behind the tractor or
self-propelled implement but also the areas to the front and side.

71 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.2.5 Display an image continuously

You want to permanently display the image of a particular camera:

1. Press centrally on the camera

screen.
→ The buttons for camera selec-
tion are displayed:

2. Press the grey button with the camera number.

→ The camera image is displayed.

5.2.6 Event-controlled image switching

Event-controlled image switching can be used if multiple analogue or digital
cameras are connected to the terminal.
In event-controlled image switching, the implement controls which camera
image is displayed. This makes sense if multiple analogue or digital cameras
are connected to the terminal and attention must be drawn to a particular
event or the implement, e.g. opening of the hydraulic press.

The implement sends a command with the camera number to the terminal via
the ISOBUS:
→ CCI.Cam displays the camera image associated with the camera number.

1. Press centrally on the camera screen.

→ The operating buttons are displayed.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Switch the "event" "on".

→ Event-controlled image switching is activated.

72 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

NOTE

Manual selection of the image is not possible.

If event-controlled image switching is turned on, you can no longer manually
select the camera image and display duration.

A few implements can directly control the Video-Multiplexer and thus deter-
mine which camera image is displayed.
→ In this case, it is not necessary for event-controlled image switching to be
switched on.

Refer to the implement's operating instructions to see how to connect the

implement to the multiplexer.

73 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.2.7 Change assignment

If the digital cameras are not numbered in the desired sequence, proceed as
follows:

1. Press centrally on the camera screen.

→ The operating buttons are displayed.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Press the "Assignment" button.

→ The buttons for selecting the
camera are displayed:

4. Press the button of the camera whose number you want to change.

5. In the "Assignment" area, assign a new number to the camera.

6. Repeat the process for the other cameras.

7. Press the Action button.

→ The settings are saved.

74 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.2.8 Automatic image switching

Using image switching, you can change automatically and in any sequence be-
tween camera images.
The duration of the display can be specified separately for each camera im-
age.

Setting
1. Press centrally on the camera screen.
→ The operating buttons are displayed.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Press the "Sequence" button.

→ The buttons for camera selec-
tion are displayed:

4. Press the button of the camera that is to be displayed first. Press the
button for as long as the camera image is to be displayed.

5. Repeat the process for the other cameras.

→ The information area (a) displays camera number and duration.

6. Press the Action button.

→ The camera image is displayed.

Start Start automatic image switching:

1. Press centrally on the camera screen.
→ The operating buttons are displayed.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Switch "Time" "on".

→ Automatic image switching starts.

75 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

NOTE

Not all camera images need be used for automatic image switching.
Omit one or more cameras in the selection of sequence and display dura-
tion.

NOTE

The settings for the sequence and the display duration of the camera
images are retained.
After a terminal restart you need only start automatic image switching.

End End automatic image switching as follows:

1. Press centrally on the camera screen.
→ The operating buttons are displayed.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Switch "Time" "off".

→ Automatic image switching is ended.
→ The latest camera image is displayed continuously.

5.2.9 Showing the image

If CCI.Cam is not visible or is only visible in Mini-View, you can display the
camera image with an AUX control of type AUX-N.

Prior prepa-
ration
Assign the Terminal function "Show image" to an operating element of the
AUX control ( Chapter 7.4.2).

1. Press the operating element "Show image" on the AUX control.

→ The camera image selected in CCI.Cam is displayed in the foreground.
→ The other apps cannot be operated.

2. Press the operating element again.

→ The window containing the camera image is closed.

76 / 366
 5 Display of camera images

5.2.10 Display next image

If several cameras are connected to the terminal, you can use an AUX control
of type AUX-N to switch to the next camera image.

Prior prepa-
ration
Assign the Terminal function "Display next image" to an operating element
of the AUX control ( Chapter 7.4.2).

Press the operating element "Display next image" on the AUX control.
→ The next camera image is displayed.

77 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6 Speed, position and geometry

This chapter introduces you to the following topics:
• Adjusting the coupling points, sections, and the position of the GPS aerial
• Preventing overlaps or gaps by correction of the delay times (Chap-
ter 6.4.4)
• Signal connector of the tractor ( Chapter 6.2.4)
• Automatic connection of an implement to the Task Controller of the Termi-
nal ( Chapter 6.3)
• Using Section Control and Rate Control simultaneously on two implements
( Chapter 6.4.7)
• Adjusting the terminal on a self-propelled implement
• Controlling an implement with a level sensor via CCI.Convert ( Chap-
ter 6.8).

You want to use Parallel Tracking, Rate Control, Section Control or Tramline
Control. These functions are location-based and require accurate information
about the tractor combination or the self-propelled implement:
• Type and source of the speed information
• Position of the GPS aerial
• Geometry of tractor and implement
• Implement mounting type
You make these settings in CCI.Config.

1. Press the "Settings" button on the start screen.

→ The "Settings" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the "Apps" button.
→ The "Apps" operating screen is displayed.

3. Press the "CCI.Config" button.

→ The "CCI.Config" operating
screen is displayed:

78 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Proceed as follows:
Set up and adjust tractor
Add an entry to the tractor list for each tractor on which you use the termi-
nal.
Define the following:
• Position of the GPS aerial
• Mounting types of the tractor
• Use the signal connector
• Output of the GPS speed

 Chapter 6.1,  Chapter 6.2

Set up and adjust implement

Add each implement to the implement list.
There are two "Select implement" buttons.
→ You can select and operate two implements simultaneously.
→ Section Control and Rate Control can be used on both implements.
Define the following:
• Position of the GPS aerial
• Implement type
• Working width
• Coupling point
• Mounting type

 Chapter 6.3,  Chapter 6.4

Adjust GPS receiver

The GPS receiver is connected directly at the terminal or connected to the
terminal via the ISOBUS.
Define the following:
• Position of the GPS aerial
• Interface of the GPS receiver

 Chapter 6.6

Tacho
Set up a tacho. Read off the travelled speed from the tacho. You can see if
you are in the optimal working area and have direct access to the tractor and
implement settings.

 Chapter 6.9

79 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.1 Adding a tractor

1. Press the "Tractor" button in the CCI.Config operating screen.

→ The "Tractor" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "+ New Tractor" button.

3. Enter the tractor name.

4. Confirm the entry.

→ The "CCI.Config" operating screen is displayed.
→ The new tractor is selected and provided with a warning symbol.

5. Set up the tractor.

→ The tractor symbol is displayed instead of the warning symbol. The
tractor can now be used.

Add all tractors where the terminal is used to the tractor list and set up the
tractors.

NOTE

The settings must be changed when switching to another tractor.

If no tractor or the incorrect tractor is selected, Parallel Tracking, Rate Con-
trol, Section Control and Tramline Control operate with incorrect settings.

Select a tractor from the list ( Chapter 6.10.1).

If the tractor is not in the list of tractors:

1. Add the tractor to it ( Chapter 6.1).
2. Set up the tractor ( Chapter 6.2).

80 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.2 Set up tractor

Adjust the tractor:

1. Press the "Tractor settings" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The tractor settings are displayed.

2. Follow the instructions in  Chapter 6.2.1 to  Chapter 6.2.5.

81 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Checks Then check the settings:

In the "CCI.Config" operating
screen, press the arrow button in
the tractor button.
→ The "Tractor" information area
is displayed.

1: Wheel speed
2: Ground speed
3: GPS speed
4: Power take off speed
5: Work position
6: Direction of travel
7: Mounting type and distance C2,
reference point tractor - rear coupling
point
8: Distance B,
reference point tractor - GPS aerial
9: Distance A,
reference point tractor - GPS aerial
10: Mounting type and distance C1,
reference point tractor - front coupling
point

82 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.2.1 GPS speed

GPS speed output

If a GPS receiver is connected to the terminal, the terminal can send the
GPS speed over the ISOBUS making it available to all ISOBUS participants.
1. Press the button "GPS speed output".
→ The "GPS speed output" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the ISOBUS message with which the GPS speed is to be sent over
the ISOBUS. You can select one or more options.

Use GPS speed

The GPS speed is free from slip and also very accurate if there is no DGPS or
RTK available.

→ We recommend using the GPS speed.

NOTE

If there is severe shading, the speed information is lost.

→ Do not use GPS speed if your fields have significant shaded areas.

NOTE

ISOBUS messages cannot always be selected.

Wheel speed and ground speed cannot be selected in the following cases:
• if another ISOBUS participant is already sending this message over the
ISOBUS
• if the ISOBUS function "TECU" is already selected in the ISOBUS settings
Select another ISOBUS message.

83 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

NOTE

Not all implements automatically evaluate the GPS speed.

On some implements, it is possible to set which ISOBUS message should be
evaluated:
Set up the implement so that the message with the GPS speed is re-
ceived and correctly evaluated.

84 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.2.2 Position of the GPS aerial

If the tractor does not have a GPS receiver, proceed to  Chapter 6.2.4.

Distance A
1. Fit the GPS aerial centrally on the tractor. This is the recommended pro-
cedure.
2. Press the button "Distance A".
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
3. Set the distance A to 0.
4. End the process with "Back".

Distance A
The distance in the transverse direction between the GPS aerial and the trac-
tor reference point:
• The tractor reference point is the midpoint of the rear axis.
• The distance is measured relative to the longitudinal axis.

The GPS aerial is to the left of the reference point in the direction of travel:
Enter distance A as a negative value.

The GPS aerial is to the right of the reference point in the direction of travel
Enter Distance A as a positive value.

The GPS aerial is on the longitudinal axis of the tractor:

Set the distance A to 0.

85 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Distance B
1. Mark the mid-point of the rear axle and the position of the GPS aerial on
the ground using chalk next to the tractor.
2. Measure the distance.
3. Press the button "Distance B".
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
4. Enter the measured value.
5. End the process with "Back".

Distance B
The distance in the longitudinal direction between the GPS aerial and the
tractor reference point:
• The tractor reference point is the midpoint of the rear axis.
• The distance is measured along the longitudinal axis.

The GPS aerial is to the rear of the reference point in the direction of travel:
Enter distance B as a negative value.

The GPS aerial is located prior to the reference point in the direction of travel:
Enter Distance B as a positive value.

The GPS aerial is precisely over the rear axis:

Set the distance B to 0.

86 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Aerial height
Distance of the highest point of the GPS aerial from the ground.
1. Measure the distance of the highest point of the GPS aerial from the
ground.
2. Press the "Aerial height" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
3. Enter the measured value.
4. End the process with "Back".

6.2.3 Mounting type

Mounting type and distance C

The distance C must be set separately for each tractor mounting type:
1. Check which mounting type the tractor has.
2. Measure distance C for each mounting type.
3. Press the "Mounting type" button.
→ The "Mounting type" selection list is displayed.
4. Press the buttons of a mounting type of the tractor.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
5. Enter the distance C.
6. Press "Back" to return to the "Mounting type" selection list.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all other mounting types.
8. Press "Back" to end the process after entry of all values.

If this symbol is displayed to the left of the tractor name, the dis-
tance C is not set for the implement mounting type.
Perform steps 4 to 6 for this mounting type.

The tractor symbol is displayed:

→ The distance C has been set for the implement mounting type.

87 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Mounting type
A tractor has several mountings on the rear.
One mounting type is assigned to each implement.

Distances C
The distance from the tractor reference point to the coupling point is different for each
mounting type:
• The tractor reference point is the midpoint of the rear axis.
• The distance is measured along the longitudinal axis.

In CCI.Config, enter the distance C for each mounting type.

It is best to take the trouble to do this immediately during set-up and in this way avoid
renewed measurement when coupling up the implement.
After coupling up an implement, all that is still necessary is to select the mounting type
in the implement settings ( Chapter 6.4.2):
→ Rate Control and Section Control automatically use the correct distance C.

NOTE

Set distance C for all mounting types.

If distance C is not set for all tractor mounting types, the position of the im-
plement being mounted, towed or trailed cannot be calculated accurately:
→ Rate Control and Section Control can be used but operate inaccurately.
→ Section Control can only be operated in manual mode.

Set the distance C for all mounting types present on the tractor.

88 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.2.4 Tractor data

Tractor with An ISOBUS tractor sends the following tractor data over the ISOBUS:
TECU
• Ground and wheel speed
• Power take off speed
• Direction of travel
• Position of the Rear 3-point hitch

Ex-works the Signal connector is switched off. For an ISOBUS tractor, main-
tain this setting under:

Signal connector
Switch "off" the signal connector
in the "Tractor settings" opera-
ting screen.
→ The buttons for setting up the
signal connector are deacti-
vated.

89 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Checks
If you have an ISOBUS tractor, you can check in the tractor settings, which
tractor data the tractor sends over the ISOBUS.

1. Connect the terminal to the signal connector

as described in the section Tractor without
TECU.
2. Switch the signal connector on.
→ The buttons of the tractor data sent from
the tractor are marked with "ISOBUS".
→ The terminal can add missing tractor data
if it is available at the signal connector.

Example
The ISOBUS tractor only sends the wheel speed over the ISOBUS. You have retrofitted a
ground speed sensor and its output signal is available at the signal connector.
The "Ground Speed" button is marked with "Signal", the "Wheel speed" button is
marked with "ISOBUS".
Set up the ground speed.
→ The terminal sends the ground speed over the ISOBUS.

Recommendation
The Tractor sends all tractor data over the ISOBUS:
Switch the signal connector "off".

Tractor data is present at the signal connector, which the tractor does not send over the
ISOBUS:
Switch the signal connector "on" and set up the additional tractor data.

90 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Tractor wit- If the tractor data is not made available on the ISOBUS by the tractor, the
hout TECU
terminal must undertake this task.

You require cable B and cable H.

1. In the ISOBUS settings, switch the ISOBUS "TECU" function on ( Chap-

ter 4.2.3).
2. Connect the terminal to the signal connector in the Tractor.
→ The terminal reads out the tractor data and sends it over the ISOBUS.

1. Connect cable B to connector B of the terminal.

2. Plug "Signal" coupling (cable B) into the "Signal" M12 plug (cable H).
3. Plug "Signal" plug (cable H) into the tractor signal connector.

Signal connector
1. Connect the terminal to the signal connector as described above.
2. Switch the signal connector "on".
→ The buttons for setting the tractor data are activated.
3. Set the tractor data as described below.

NOTE

The signal socket is "on" but the tractor sends the tractor data over
the ISOBUS.
If the terminal detects a TECU on the ISOBUS with the signal connector swit-
ched on, then the buttons for setting the tractor data are marked with
"ISOBUS" and deactivated:
• Wheel and ground speed, PTO speed and work position cannot be set.
• The terminal does not send any tractor data over the ISOBUS.

91 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Wheel speed
Take the number of pulses per distance travelled from the tractor's techni-
cal data.
Values between 200 and 30000 pulses/100 m are valid.

1. Press the "Wheel speed" button.

→ The "Wheel speed" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the input field.
→ The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter the number of pulses per 100 m and confirm the entry.
→ The "Wheel speed" operating screen is displayed.
4. End the process with "Back".

Calibrate the wheel speed in the following cases:

• The wheel speed sensor was retrofitted to the tractor
• The technical data of the tractor do not include any information about
the wheel speed sensor
 Section Wheel speed calibration

Ground speed
Take the number of pulses per distance travelled from the tractor's techni-
cal data sheet of the ground speed sensor.
The valid value range is between 200 and 30000 pulses/100 m.

1. Press the "Ground speed" button.

→ The "Ground speed" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the input field.
→ The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter the number of pulses per 100 m and confirm the entry.
→ The "Ground speed" operating screen is displayed.
4. End the process with "Back".

Calibrate the ground speed sensor, if the technical data of the ground speed
sensor are not available:
 Section Ground speed calibration.

92 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Power take off speed

Take the number of pulses per revolution from the tractor's technical data.

Values between 1 and 40 pulses/rev are valid. A frequent value in practice

is 6.

1. Press the "PTO sensor" button.

→ The "PTO sensor" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the input field.
→ The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter the number of pulses per PTO rotation and confirm the entry.
→ The "PTO sensor" operating screen is displayed.
4. End the process with "Back".

Rear 3-point hitch

see section Calibrate rear 3-point hitch and Setting the work position.

X-Sensor
Switch the "X-Sensor" "on".
→ The terminal reads out the speed data at the signal connector.

NOTE

The X-Sensor is a retrofittable speed sensor.

Only switch the X-Sensor on, if the tractor has an X-Sensor and the sensor
output is output to the signal connector.

93 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Calibrate
wheel speed NOTE

A field is not suitable for calibration of the speed.

Calibrate the speed on smooth surfaces (e.g. asphalt) and not on a field.

Prior prepa-
ration
Set out a distance of 100 m.

Position the tractor at the start of the distance.

1. Open the "CCI.Config" operating screen and press on the "Tractor set-
tings" button.
→ The tractor settings are displayed.

2. Switch the signal connector "on".

→ The "Wheel speed sensor" button is activated.

3. Press the "Wheel speed sensor" button.

→ The Wheel speed sensor" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Press the "Calibrate" button.

→ The operating screen "Step 1 of 2" is displayed.

94 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

5. Press the "START" button.

→ The operating screen "Step 2 of 2" is displayed.
→ The pulse counter displays the current value.

6. Drive 100 m and then press the "STOP" button.

→ The "Wheel speed sensor" operating screen is displayed.
→ The "Pulses/100 m" input field indicates the measured value.

7. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Tractor settings" operating screen is displayed.

Calibrate
ground
Proceed as described in the section Wheel speed calibration.
speed
In step 4, press the button "Ground speed sensor" button.

95 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Calibrate
rear 3-point
hitch

1. Open the "CCI.Config" operating screen and press on the "Tractor set-
tings" button.
→ The tractor settings are displayed.

2. Switch the signal connector "on".

→ The "Rear 3-point hitch" button is activated.

3. Press the "Rear 3-point hitch" button.

→ The "Rear 3-point hitch" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Press the "Calibrate" button.

→ The operating screen "Step 1 of 2" is displayed.

5. Fully lift the rear 3-point hitch and then press the "MAX" button.
→ The operating screen "Step 2 of 2" is displayed.
→ The voltage value for the maximum is indicated.

6. Fully lower the rear 3-point hitch and then press on the "MIN" button.
→ The voltage values for the maximum and minimum are indicated.

7. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Tractor settings" operating screen is displayed.

96 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Set working Some tractors make the work position available via the signal connector. Pro-
position
ceed as follows:

1. Open the "CCI.Config" operating screen and press on the "Tractor set-
tings" button.
→ The tractor settings are displayed.

2. Switch the signal connector "on".

→ The "Rear 3-point hitch" button is activated.

3. Press the "Rear 3-point hitch" button.

→ The "Rear 3-point hitch" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Switch the signal connector "on".

→ Terminal uses the work position from the signal connector.

5. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Tractor settings" operating screen is displayed.

97 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

If the Work position is not available at the Signal connector, set this as
follows:

1. Move the Rear 3-point hitch to the work position and from the "Rear 3-
point hitch" input dialogue read off the percentage value for the position
(a).

2. Switch "off" the signal connector in the "Rear 3-point hitch" input dia-
logue.
→ The "Threshold" button is activated.

3. Press the "Threshold" input field.

→ The screen keyboard is displayed.

4. Enter the value read off in step 1 and confirm the entry.

5. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Tractor settings" operating screen is displayed.

NOTE

Sometimes the EHR impairs display of the working position.

The display of the rear 3-point hitch then alternates between work position
and transport position.

1. End the lifting of the rear 3-point hitch in step 1 a few centimetres before
the work position is reached.
2. Use the displayed percentage value as a threshold.

98 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.2.5 Power Management

Power Management is a switch-off delay. When you pull out the ignition key,
the terminal is shut down with a delay.
→ Processes running on the terminal the ISOBUS implement can be ended.

Power Management can only be used in conjunction with an ISOBUS upgrade

kit.
On a tractor factory-fitted with ISOBUS, Power Management does not work:

Switch "Power Management" off.

NOTE

Only selected ISOBUS upgrade kits support Power Management.

Only switch Power Management on, if the ISOBUS upgrade kit supports this
function.

Power Management
Switch "Power Management" "on".
→ The terminal is shut down with a delay when you pull out the ignition
switch.

99 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.3 Add implement

NOTE

An ISOBUS implement with TC client automatically inserts itself into

the implement list.
The implement also automatically makes the implement setting available.
→ An ISOBUS implement with a TC client need not be manually added.

If an ISOBUS implement with a TC client does not automatically enter itself

in the list, there is an error.
Refer to chapter  Chapter 11.1, to see how this error can be rectified.

Add a new implement to the implement list, if you want to use the implement
for documentation of tasks, for Section Control or Rate Control.
You need only the implement, if it does not automatically enter itself in the
implement list. This applies to the following implements:
• Implements without ISOBUS
• ISOBUS implements without a TC client

Add an implement:
1. Press the "Implement" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.
→ The "Rear implement" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "+ new Implement" button.

3. Enter the implement name.

4. Confirm the entry.

→ The list of implements is displayed. The new implement is selected.

5. Return to the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

100 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

NOTE

The settings must be changed when changing the implement.

If no tractor or the incorrect tractor is selected, Rate Control and Section
Control work with incorrect settings.
Select the implement from the list ( Chapter 6.10.5).

If the implement is not in the list of implements:

1. Add the implement to it ( Chapter 6.3).
2. Set up the implement ( Chapter 6.4).

TC client and UT client

The implement list in CCI.Config must not be confused with the implement
list stored in the "Saved implements" operating screen.
• "Saved implements" manages the implements that can be operated with
the terminal.
• CCI.Config manages the implements that are to be used for documenta-
tion, Section Control or Rate Control.
You can operate an ISOBUS implement with the app CCI.UT A or CCI.UT B. Both apps
log on to the ISOBUS as a Universal Terminal (UT). The ISOBUS- implement has a UT
client which connects to the UT on the terminal.
You carry out the documentation of tasks, Section Control and Rate Control with the
apps CCI.Control and CCI.Command. These apps log on to the ISOBUS as a Task Con-
troller (TC). The ISOBUS implement has a TC client which connects to the TC on the ter-
minal.
Implement operation and documentation/Section Control/Rate Control can be performed
on separate ISOBUS terminals:
• "Universal Terminal" is on and "Task Controller" off on the terminal for implement
operation.
→ The UT client of the implement connects to this terminal.
• On the second terminal, "Universal Terminal" is off and "Task Controller" on.
→ The TC client of the implement connects to this terminal.

101 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4 Set-up Implement

You must make all settings for manually added implements.

An ISOBUS implement with TC client automatically enters itself in the imple-

ment list and also makes the implement settings.
→ Settings made by the implement cannot be changed.

Check the settings for completeness.

Add any missing settings.

Configure the implement:

102 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

1. Press the "Implement settings" button.

→ The implement settings are displayed.

2. Follow the instructions in  Chapter 6.4.1 to  Chapter 6.4.7.

Checks Then check the settings:

In the "CCI.Config" operating
screen, press the arrow button in
the implement button.
→ The "Implement" information
area is displayed.

1: Number of sections
2: Working width
3: Mounting type
4: Distance D1,
coupling point - implement reference
point
5: Distance E,
implement reference point - midpoint of
the sections
6: Distance D2,
first implement reference point - coup-
ling point of the second implement
7: Second implement mounting type
8: Number of booms.
→ In the example, two booms each of
one section width.
9: Distance B
10: Distance A

103 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.1 Working width and implement type

Working width
1. Press the "Working width" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the working width.
3. End the process with "Back".

Implement type
1. Press the "Implement type" button
→ The "Implement type" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the implement type.
3. End the process with "Back".

Implement type

With trailed implements (2) and self-propelled implements (3), the position of the sec-
tions for curved tracks is calculated.

With attached implements (1), the position of the sections is fixed.

104 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.2 Mounting type and reference point

Mounting type
1. Press the "Mounting type" button.
→ The "Mounting type" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the mounting type.
3. End the process with "Back".

Mounting type
In the tractor settings you have entered a distance C for each available trac-
tor mounting type. Simply select the implement mounting type in the imple-
ment settings.
→ Repeat entry of distance C is not necessary.

105 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Distance D1

1. Press the button "Distance D1".

→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the distance D1.
3. End the process with "Back".

Distance D1

D1 is the distance between the coupling point and the implement reference point:
• With trailed implements, the reference point is on the midpoint of the first axle
• With attached implements, the implement manufacturer specifies the position of the
reference point
• For manually created implements (e.g. tillage equipment), measure distance D1
between the coupling point and the last component (e.g. the roller)

106 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.3 Section widths: Geometry and delay times

The section geometry, the delay times and the overlap must be set separately
for each implement boom.
→ A group of buttons is made available for each boom in the implement set-
tings.
Some implements make a designation available for the boom.
→ This designation is preset as a title for the group.
→ If no designation is available, the group is overwritten with "Implement" or
"-".

Section geometry
The following are displayed in the "Section geometry" information area:
• The values (1)-(4), (6), (8), (9) set in the implement
• The delay times corrected on the terminal (5), (7)

This information is only of interest for servicing.

1. Press the "Section geometry" button.

→ The following are displayed in the "Section geometry" information
area.

1: Number of sections
→ The numbering goes from left to
right in the direction of travel.
2: Working width of the section
3: Working depth of the section
4: Turn on delay
5: Corrected turn on delay
6: Turn off delay
7: Corrected turn off delay
8: Distance E
→ The distance between the implement
reference point and the midpoint of
the section.
→ The distance is measured in the di-
rection of travel.
9: Distance F
→ The distance between the implement
reference point and the midpoint of
the section.
→ The distance is measured perpendi-
cular to the direction of travel.

107 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.4 Set delay times or correct them

You can set the delay times and correct the delay times set in the implement.

Delay times and correction values

The turn on delay specifies the time delay between the command and the
application. During spraying, it is the time from the command "Turn on sec-
tion" until the agent is applied.

The turn off delay specifies the time delay between the command and the actual swit-
ching off of a section.
The delay times are already set in the factory for many ISOBUS implements or can be
taken from the technical data of the implement.
If this data is missing, you must determine the delay times by taking your own measu-
rements.
You correct the implement factory settings using the correction values for the switch-on
delay time and the switch-off delay time, e.g. if these are unusable.

108 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Setting delay times

For some ISOBUS implements the delay times are not set in the factory.
→ In the "Section geometry" information area ( Chapter 6.4.3), the delay
times have the value "0" or "-".

You can enter the delay times or allow the terminal to calculate them in the
operating screen "Delay times":

1: Explanatory text:
→ Overlapping in the driving di-
rection is set.
2: Enter delay time
3: Allow the delay time to be calcu-
lated

Enter delay
time NOTE

Overlapping in the driving direction affects the switching points.

If an overlap is set in the driving direction ( Chapter 6.4.5), you are made
aware of this by an explanatory text.
When setting the delay times, consider the effect of the overlap in the
driving direction on the switching points.

We recommend:
First check the set delay times, then the overlap in the driving direction.

1. Take the delay times from the implement technical data.

2. Press the button "Delay times" .

→ The "Delay times" operating screen is displayed.

3. Press the "ISO + 0 ms" button on the right next to the "Turn on delay".
→ The keyboard is displayed.

109 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

4. Enter the turn on delay and confirm your entry.

 Only positive values can be entered.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for turn off delay.

Allow the
delay time
to be calcu-
lated

1. Press the button "Delay times" .

→ The "Delay times" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "Calculate" button on the right next to the "Turn on delay".
→ The operating screen "Step 1 of 3" is displayed.

3. Follow the instructions and end the process in the operation screen
"Step 3 of 3" with "Completed".

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for turn off delay.

→ The overlap in the driving direction is considered in calculating the
delay times.

NOTE

Additional implement settings for implements with multiple booms.

So that Rate Control and Section Control work accurately, the delay times
must be set for each boom.
→ Additional buttons are displayed in the implement settings.
Set the delay times for each boom.

110 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Correct delay times

In some ISOBUS implements, the delay times are set, but the set values can-
not be used. In this case, you must determine the correct values yourself by
carrying out your own measurements. Then correct the delay times in the ter-
minal.

Select the switch-on or switch-off delay time, dependent on whether you want
to improve switching on or switching off.
→ The correction value is added to or subtracted from the value set in the im-
plement.
→ The correction value is applied to all sections.

1. Turn off.
2. Turn on.

NOTE

Section Control uses the corrected delay times.

The corrected delay time is saved in the terminal, not in the implement. It is
available again after restarting the terminal.
The corrected delay time is automatically set, if you start working again with
the implement after an interruption.

111 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

You can enter the correction values or allow the terminal to calculate them in
the operating screen "Delay times":
1: Explanatory text:
→ Overlapping in the driving di-
rection is set.
2: Enter the correction value
3: Allow the correction value to be
calculated

Enter the
correction NOTE
value
Overlapping in the driving direction affects the switching points.
If an overlap is set in the driving direction ( Chapter 6.4.5), you are made
aware of this by an explanatory text.
When setting the correction values, consider the effect of the overlap in
the driving direction on the switching points.

We recommend:
First check the set correction values, then the overlap in the driving di-
rection.

1. Press the button "Delay times" .

→ The "Delay times" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "ISO + 0 ms" button on the right next to the "Turn on delay".
→ The keyboard is displayed.

3. Enter the correction value of the turn on delay and confirm the entry.
→ A positive value is added to the value set in the implement.
→ A negative value is subtracted from the value set in the implement.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the correction value of the turn off delay.

112 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Example
1: Turn on delay time set in the im-
plement: 1000 ms
2: Correction value -144 ms set by
you.
→ Corrected turn on delay:
1000 ms - 144 ms = 856 ms
3: Turn off delay time set in the im-
plement 100 ms.
4: No correction value.
→ Corrected turn off delay:
100 ms

Allow the
correction
value to be
calculated

1. Press the button "Delay times" .

→ The "Delay times" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "Calculate" button on the right next to the "Turn on delay".
→ The operating screen "Step 1 of 3" is displayed.

3. Follow the instructions and end the process in the operation screen
"Step 3 of 3" with "Completed".

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the correction value of the turn off delay.
→ The overlap in the driving direction is considered in calculating the
delay times.

113 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

NOTE

Additional implement settings for implements with multiple booms.

So that Rate Control and Section Control work accurately, the delay times
must be corrected for each boom.
→ Additional buttons are displayed in the implement settings.
Correct the delay times for each boom.

114 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.5 Overlap
What is your priority?
• Complete working
• Avoiding double treatments
You can achieve the result you want using the overlap settings.

NOTE

An overlap in driving direction of >0 cm or <0 cm influences the swit-

ching points.
First check the set delay times, then the overlap in the driving direction.
When setting the delay times, consider the effect of the overlap on the
switching points.

Overlap in driving direction

The valid value range for the overlap in the driving direction is between -
2000 cm and +2000 cm.

1. Press the "Overlap in driving direction" button.

→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the overlap.
3. End the process with "Back".

Overlap in driving direction

Do you also want to avoid even the smallest possible working gaps on the
headland, e.g. during sowing or crop protection?

Use "Overlap in driving direction".

115 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Degree of overlap
Valid values for the degree of overlap are 0, 50 or 100 %.
1. Press the "Degree of overlap" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the degree of overlap.
3. End the process with "Back".

Degree of overlap
Specify when a section is switched off if it overlaps an already worked area.
Set the priority either on complete working or an avoiding double treat-
ments.

0%
→ The section is switched off before overlapping occurs. (left image)
→ Missed areas may occur.
→ Double treatments are avoided.

50 %
→ The section is switched off, if half of this section is located in an already worked area
(middle graphic).

100 %
→ The section is only switched off, if it is completely located in an already worked area
(right graphic).
→ Complete working is achieved.
→ Double treatments may occur.

116 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Overlap tolerance
Specify how outer right and left sections react to overlaps.
Values between 0 cm and half of the outer section are valid for the overlap
tolerance.

1. Press the "Overlap tolerance" button.

→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the overlap tolerance.
3. End the process with "Back".

Overlap tolerance with 0 % degree of overlap

With parallel tracks in the field (e.g. with tramlines) it can occur, that the ou-
ter left and right sections are sometimes temporarily displayed over an al-
ready worked area, although actually no double treatment is occurring.
→ In general the cause is GPS drift.

With 0 % degree of overlap, the outer section is switched off in this case.
→ A "fluttering" (continuous switching on and off) can occur.
→ Fluttering is prevented by setting the overlap tolerance.

117 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Overlap tolerance with 100 % degree of overlap

In runs over already worked areas (e.g. the headland) the outer sections
may sometimes switch on in an undesired way.
→ Causes for this are GPS drift or a track that has not been precisely follo-
wed.

The overlap tolerance can prevent the unwanted switching on of the sections.

118 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Overlap tolerance at field boundary

Values between 0 cm and half of the outer section are valid for the overlap
tolerance.

1. Press the "Overlap tolerance at field boundary" button.

→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the overlap tolerance.
3. End the process with "Back".

CAUTION!

GPS drift can cause switching on and off of the outer section at the
field boundaries.
With a field boundary overlap tolerance of >0 cm, you minimise switching on
and off. If necessary, however, you may also be working beyond the field
boundary.

We recommend the 0 cm setting.

→ If you set another value, you must check whether working beyond the field
boundary is acceptable.

NOTE

Additional implement settings for implements with multiple booms.

So that Rate Control and Section Control work accurately, the overlap must
be set for each boom.
→ Additional buttons are displayed in the implement settings.
Set the overlap in the driving direction, the degree of overlap and the
overlap tolerance for each boom.

119 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.6 Section control only in the headland

Section Control only in the headland on/off

Switch the button "Section control only in the headland" "on".
→ Sections are only automatically switched in the headland.

Section Control only in the headland

When using seed drills and planters with very small sections (e.g. less than a
meter) then with parallel tracks the result may be undesired switching off of
the outer sections.
→ In general the cause is GPS drift.

Undesired switching off cannot always be avoided by adapting the overlap tolerance. In
this case the option "Section control only in the headland", helps to avoid missed areas.
→ The automatic switching on and off of the sections takes place in the marked head-
land (orange), not on the worked area (blue).

120 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.4.7 Second implement

A second implement is coupled to the rear of the implement. Both implements
should be used for Rate Control or Section Control.

Set the mounting type and distance D2 of the second implement in the first
implement.

Prior prepa-
ration
Arrange the implements in the "CCI.Config" operating screen in the correct
sequence ( Chapter 6.10.6).

Measure distance D2 at the first implement.

Mounting type
1. Press the "Mounting type" button.
→ The "Mounting type" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the mounting type.
3. End the process with "Back".

NOTE

Select the same mounting type in the settings of the second imple-
ment.

The selected mounting types must be the same.

1. Open the settings of the second implement.
2. Select the same mounting type for the se-
cond implement as you selected in the set-
tings of the first implement.

121 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Distance D2

1. Press the button "Distance D2".

→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter distance D2.
3. End the process with "Back".

Distance D2

Distance between the first implement reference point and the coupling point of the se-
cond implement:
• In total D1 and D2 add up to the distance between the coupling point of the first im-
plement and the coupling point of the second implement.
• With trailed implements, the reference point is on the midpoint of the first axle.
• With attached implements, the implement manufacturer specifies the position of the
reference point.

122 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.5 Set up self-propelled implement

The self-propelled implement is subdivided into two functional units:
• Tractor
• Implement

The self-propelled implement automatically inserts itself in the tractor and im-
plement lists and makes most settings automatically.
→ Settings made by the self-propelled implement cannot be changed.

Check the tractor settings and implement settings of the self-propelled im-
plement for completeness.

Add any missing settings.

NOTE

A self-propelled implement is set up like a tractor with an attached

implement.
The description of the settings can be found in  Chapter 6.2 "Set up trac-
tor" and  Chapter 6.4 "Set-up Implement".

123 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Tractor settings of the self-propelled implement:

1. Press the "Set up self-propelled implement" button in the "CCI.Config" ope-

rating screen.
→ The tractor settings are displayed.

2. Follow the instructions in  Chapter 6.2.1 and  Chapter 6.2.4.

124 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Implement settings of the self-propelled implement:

1. Press the "Implement settings" button.

→ The implement settings are displayed.

2. Follow the instructions in  Chapter 6.4.3 to  Chapter 6.4.6.

125 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Checks Then check the settings:

In the "CCI.Config" operating
screen, press the arrow button in
the self-propelled implement but-
tons.
→ The "TECU" information area is
displayed.

1: Wheel speed
2: Ground speed
3: GPS speed
4: Power take off speed
5: Work position
6: Direction of travel

In the "CCI.Config" operating

screen, press the arrow button in
the implement button.
→ The "Implement" information
area is displayed.

1: Number of sections
2: Working width
3: Distance E,
implement reference point - midpoint of
the sections
4: Distance B
5: Distance A

126 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.6 GPS settings

The terminal can read in position data from a GPS receiver.

NOTE

The position data must comply with the standards NMEA 0183 or
NMEA 2000 or J1939.
If the GPS receiver uses another protocol, the terminal cannot read in the
position data. Section Control and all other location-related functions cannot
be used.
Ensure that the GPS receiver corresponds to the standards NMEA 0183,
NMEA 2000 or J1939.

You must set the position and interface of the GPS receiver:

1. Press the "GPS" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The "GPS settings" operating screen is displayed.

2. Follow the instructions in  Chapter 6.6.1,  Chapter 6.6.2 and  Chap-

ter 6.6.3.
3. Then check the GPS settings in the information area.

127 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Checks
The data in the information area (1) is dis-
played, if the following apply:
• A GPS receiver connected and sending
data
• GPS source, interface and baud rate
have been correctly selected

NOTE

Accuracy requirements of the position data of the GPS receiver.

Use a receiver of accuracy 20 cm or better. With an NMEA 0183 GPS receiver,
select a baud rate of at least 19200.
The minimum requirement for the data record is:
• GGA and VTG at a frequency of 5 Hz
• GSA at a frequency of 1 Hz

128 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.6.1 Position of the GPS aerial

Position of the GPS aerial
You specify whether the GPS aerial is attached on the tractor or the imple-
ment.
1. Press the button "Position of the GPS receiver".
→ The "Position of the GPS aerial" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the position of the GPS aerial.
3. End the process with "Back".
→ The "GPS settings" operating screen is displayed.

Position of the GPS aerial

There are two options for attachment of a GPS aerial:

1. On the tractor.
→ Enter the distances A and B in the tractor settings.
2. On the implement.
→ Select "Front implement", "Implement" or "Second implement".
→ Only attach the GPS aerial to the implement if the implement sends distances A
and B to the terminal.

We recommend attaching the GPS receiver on the tractor.

129 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.6.2 GPS source

GPS source
1. Press the button "GPS source".
→ The "GPS source" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the GPS source.
3. If you have selected "RS232 - serial", then define the serial interface
and baud rate now.
4. End the process with "Back".
→ The "GPS settings" operating screen is displayed.

GPS source
Dependent on the model, a GPS receiver sends position data according to
one of the following protocols:
• NMEA 0183, via the serial interface
• NMEA 2000, via the ISOBUS
• J1939, via the ISOBUS
The terminal supports all three protocols.

Connect GPS receiver and terminal as follows:

1. The GPS receiver has a serial interface.
→ Connect the GPS receiver to connector B or C of the terminal.
→ Select "RS232 - serial" as the GPS source.
→ Select the connector as the serial interface to which the GPS receiver is connec-
ted.
2. The automatic steering system has a serial interface for the GPS signal.
→ Connect the serial interface of the steering system to connector B or C of the ter-
minal.
→ Select "RS232 - serial" as the GPS source.
→ Select the connector to which the steering system is connected as the serial inter-
face.
3. The GPS receiver has an ISOBUS interface.
→ Connect the GPS receiver at the ISOBUS.
→ Select "ISOBUS (NMEA 2000)" or "ISOBUS (J1939)" as the GPS source.

130 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

If you have selected "RS232 - serial" as the GPS source, you must configure
the serial interface:
Serial interface
Configure the connector to which the GPS receiver or the steering system is
connected.

1. Press the button "Serial interface".

→ The "Serial interface" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the connector.
3. End the process with "Back".
→ The "GPS source" operating screen is displayed.

Baud rate
The baud rate of the terminal and the GPS receiver must match.

1. Press the "Baud rate" button.

→ The "Baud rate" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the baud rate.
3. End the process with "Back".
→ The "GPS source" operating screen is displayed.

NOTE

The baud rate of the terminal and the GPS receiver must match.
Otherwise, the terminal cannot evaluate the position data of the GPS recei-
ver.
If you do not know the baud rate of the GPS receiver, select the "Auto"
setting.
→ The terminal automatically determines the baud rate of the GPS recei-
ver.
→ This may take a while.

131 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.6.3 Adjust GPS receiver

You can adjust some GPS receivers easily and quickly from the terminal.
→ This function is only available for GPS receivers with a serial interface.

Prior prepa-
ration
Connect the GPS receiver to the terminal on.

In the "GPS source" set the baud rate to "Auto".

Recom- Optimally adjust the GPS receiver with just a single click:
mended set-
tings
1. Press the button "Adjust GPS receiver".
→ The "Adjust GPS receiver" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the button "GPS receiver".
→ The "GPS receiver" selection list is displayed.
3. Select the connected GPS receiver.
4. Press "Back" to return to the "Adjust GPS receiver" operating screen.
5. Press the button "Recommended settings".
→ The GPS receiver settings are changed according to our recommenda-
tions ( Appendix E).
6. Press the "Settings" button and end the process.

Manually You can also set the GPS receiver manually.

changing
the settings

NOTE

If the configuration is made incorrectly, GPS receiving is interrupted

or suspended.
Read the GPS receiver manual carefully.

132 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

1. Press the button "Adjust GPS receiver".

→ The "Adjust GPS receiver" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the button "GPS receiver".
→ The "GPS receiver" selection list is displayed.
3. Select GPS receiver or "Universal"
4. Press "Back" to return to the "Adjust GPS receiver" operating screen.
5. Set the baud rate, NMEA data, SBAS and GLIDE.
6. Press the "Settings" button and end the process.

6.7 Tilt sensor

The terminal can read in the inclination angle from a tilt sensor.

NOTE

You need the manufacturer’s instruction manual.

These operating instructions only describe setting up of the terminal.
See the manufacturer’s instruction manual for more information on the tilt
sensor:
• Connecting the sensor to the terminal
• Operation of the sensor
• Evaluation of the sensor data by the implement

Open the tilt sensor settings:

The following setting options are available at the terminal:

Tilt sensor on
The "Tilt sensor" switch is set to "off" in the presetting.
You have connected a tilt sensor to the terminal:
Switch "Tilt sensor" "on".
→ The terminal reads out the tilt sensor data.

133 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Distance to the ground

Distance of the highest point of the tilt sensor from the ground.
1. Measure the distance of the highest point of the tilt sensor from the
ground.
2. Press the button "Distance to the ground".
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
3. Enter the measured value.
4. End the process with "Back".

6.8 CCI.Convert
When working with an N-sensor and an ISOBUS implement, the application
quantity should be automatically matched to the circumstances on the field.
The N-sensor controls the application quantity of the ISOBUS implement. The
setpoints of the N-sensor replace the setpoints of the application map.

The sensor signal must be converted to a setpoint for the ISOBUS implement.
→ CCI.Convert converts the manufacturer-specific signals from N-sensors to
implement-readable ISOBUS messages.

The following formats are supported:

• LH5000
• ASD
• ASD Section Control
• TUVR

134 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

1. Press the "CCI.Convert" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The "CCI.Convert" operating screen is displayed.

2. Set up the protocol, interface and implement as described below.

Prior prepa-
ration
Determine which protocol the sensor uses for data transmission.

Connect the sensor and implement to the ISOBUS.

Select the implement in Implement settings ( Chapter 6.10.5).

You have the following setting options:

CCI.Convert on/off
Switch CCI.Convert on or off.
Press the "CCI.Convert" button.
→ The switch changes the position.

Serial interface
The terminal has one serial interface at each of the connectors B and C.
CCI.Convert specifies the connector to which the sensor must be connected.
Changing is not possible.
→ The connector is indicated.
→ Connect the sensor to this connector. Use cable B for connector B or
Cable C1 or C2 for connector C.

135 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Select protocol
Select the protocol to which the sensor sends a value.
1. Press the "Protocol" button.
→ The "Protocol" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the protocol.
3. End the process with "Back".
→ The "CCI.Convert" operating screen is displayed.
→ The selected protocol is indicated on the "Protocol" button.

Select implement
Select the implement to which the sensor setpoints are to be sent.
1. Press the "Implement" button.
→ The list of implements is displayed.
2. Select an implement or the option "Automatically select the implement".
3. End the process with "Back".
→ The "CCI.Convert" operating screen is displayed.
→ The selected protocol is indicated on the "Implement" button.

NOTE

When selecting the implement we recommend the setting "Automati-

cally select the implement".
This is the default setting.
CCI.Convert automatically searches for the implement to which the sensor
setpoints are to be sent.
Correct the setting, if automatic mode selects the incorrect implement.

136 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.9 Tacho
Set up a tacho in CCI.Config. You can obtain a quick overview of the settings
of tractor and implement with tacho:

The following information is displayed to the right of the right alongside the
tacho display:
• The selected tractor
• The selected implement
• the CCI.Convert settings

NOTE

Tractor and implement must be chosen correctly.

Otherwise the terminal works with incorrect settings.
Check whether the tractor and implement are correctly selected.

One of the following values can be displayed in the tacho:

• The wheel speed
• The ground speed
• The GPS speed
• The PTO speed
Select the indicated value (1) and set the display range (2) and the optimum
working range (3).

In the tacho, you have direct access (4) to the following functions:
• the implement settings
• the tractor settings
• CCI.Convert

137 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

You have the following operating options:

Selecting the displayed value

You select which value is to be displayed in the tacho:
• The wheel speed
• The ground speed
• The GPS speed
• The PTO speed

1. Press the button above the tacho.

→ A selection list is displayed.
2. Select the value.
→ The selected value is displayed on the tacho.
3. Set the display range and the optimum working range for the selected
value.

Setting the display range

Set the tacho minimum and maximum.
1. Four values are displayed below the tacho. Press the left outer button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the smallest value, that is still to be displayed and confirm the
entry.
3. Press the right outer button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
4. Enter the largest value, that is still to be displayed and confirm the
entry.
→ The tacho display range is set.

138 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Setting the optimum working range

The optimum working range is displayed on the tacho in green. You can see
at a glance whether a speed correction or PTO rpm correction is necessary.
1. Four values are displayed below the tacho. Press the second button from
the left.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the lower limit of the optimum working range and confirm the
entry.
3. Press the second button from the right.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
4. Enter the upper limit of the optimum working range and confirm the
entry.
→ The optimum working range is displayed on the tacho in green.

Tractor, implement and CCI.Convert settings

Press in the area to the right of the tacho.
→ The "CCI.Config" operating screen is displayed.

NOTE

The display range and optimum working range are saved separately
for each speed and the PTO speed.
The settings are available again after a restart.

139 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.10 Operation
You have added and adjusted the tractors on which the terminal will be used,
and the implements ( Chapter 6.1 to  Chapter 6.9).
You have the following operating options:
• Tractor selecting, deleting, editing and exporting
• Selecting, deleting, editing and exporting of implements
• Using GPS simulation

6.10.1 Select tractor

The list in the "Tractor" operating screen contains the following elements:
• Tractors created by you
• All tractors with TC client that have already been connected to the terminal
at least once

Select the tractor on which the terminal is to be used:

1. Open the "CCI.Config" screen.

2. Press the "Tractor" button.

→ The list of tractors is displayed.

3. Select the Tractor.

4. Press "Back" to return to the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

140 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

5. In the "Tractor" button, press the arrow.

→ The information area pops up.

6. Check the settings.

7. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

6.10.2 Edit tractor

You can change the tractor name.

1. Press the "Tractor" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The list of tractors is displayed.

2. Press the button with the tractor and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

3. Select "Edit".
→ The "Tractor name" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the tractor name.

5. Confirm the entry.

→ The "CCI.Config" operating screen is displayed.
→ The tractor is selected.

141 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.10.3 Delete tractor

Delete a tractor as follows:

1. Press the "Tractor" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The list of tractors is displayed.

2. Press the button with the tractor and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

3. Select "Delete".
→ Message window 54002 is displayed.

4. Confirm the message.

→ The tractor is deleted.
→ The "Tractor" operating screen is displayed.

6.10.4 Export tractor

Prior prepa-
ration
Connect a flash drive to the terminal.

1. Press the "Tractor" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The list of tractors is displayed.

2. Press the button with the tractor and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

3. Select "Export tractor".

→ The tractor is saved on the flash drive.

NOTE

Exporting a tractor to the flash drive is only relevant in service

cases.

142 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.10.5 Select implement

The list in the "Implement" operating screen contains the following elements:
• Implements created by you
• All ISOBUS implements with TC client that have already been connected to
the terminal at least once

Select the implement coupled to the tractor.

→ The implement can be used for documentation of tasks, for Rate Control
and Section Control.

1. Open the "CCI.Config" screen.

2. Press the upper of the two "Select implement" buttons.

→ The list of implements is displayed.

3. Select the implement.

4. Press "Back" to return to the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

5. In the "Implement" button, press the arrow.

→ The information area pops up.

6. Check the settings.

7. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

143 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

NOTE

Select the correct implement.

The selected implement must be coupled to the tractor.
→ If you select an incorrect implement, Section Control and Rate Control do
not work.
Carry out this procedure each time, if you want to couple a new imple-
ment to the tractor.

6.10.6 Select two implements

You can attach two implements to the tractor and perform two operations in
one work step, e.g. sowing and fertilising. The following attachment se-
quences are possible:
• Both implements are located behind the tractor:
o The first implement is coupled to the tractor
o The second implement is coupled to the first implement
• The first implement is located in front of the tractor and the second imple-
ment is located behind the tractor

You can use both implements for documentation of tasks, Rate Control and
Section Control.

The operating screen "CCI.Config" has two "Implement" buttons for this appli-
cation:

Using the upper "implement" button,

select the first implement.
Using the lower "implement" button sel-
ect the second implement.

144 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

NOTE

Assign the two implements to the two buttons in the order in which
they are attached.
Rate Control and Section Control cannot correctly calculate the geometry of
the tractor combination if the sequence is incorrectly selected.
→ Switching of the sections and the change in the application rate occur in
the wrong location.

NOTE

For two implements coupled sequentially, the distance D2 and the

mounting type must be set.
Open the settings of the first implement and set distance D2 and
mounting type ( Chapter 6.4.7).

6.10.7 Edit implement

You can change the implement name.
1. Press the "Implement" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.
→ The list of implements is displayed.

2. Press the button with the implement and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

3. Select "Edit".
→ The "Implement name" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the implement name.

5. Confirm the entry.

→ The "CCI.Config" operating screen is displayed.
→ The implement is selected.

145 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.10.8 Delete implement

Delete an implement as follows:

1. Press the "Implement" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The list of implements is displayed.

2. Press the button with the implement and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed

3. Select "Delete".
→ Message window 54001 is displayed.

4. Confirm the message.

→ The implement is deleted.
→ The list of implements is displayed.

NOTE

Not all implements can be deleted.

ISOBUS implements that have been automatically added to the implement
list cannot be deleted.
Implements that you have added ( Chapter 6.3) can be deleted.

146 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

6.10.9 Export implement

Prior prepa-
ration
Connect a flash drive to the terminal.

1. Press the "Implement" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The list of implements is displayed.

2. Press the button with the implement and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

3. Select "Export implement".

→ The implement is saved on the flash drive.

NOTE

Exporting an implement to the flash drive is only relevant in service

cases.

6.10.10 GPS simulation

For tests and demonstrations, it is helpful if a GPS track previously recorded
or previously imported to the terminal can be replayed.
→ In a quiet hall, you can simulate the passage over a field.

NOTE

You need a password to play back the GPS track.

GPS simulation
You can record or import, playback, and export a GPS track using the termi-
nal.

1. Press the "GPS" button in the "CCI.Config" operating screen.

→ The "GPS settings" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the button "GPS simulation".
→ The "GPS simulation" operating screen is displayed.

147 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

You have the following operating options:

Record GPS track
For example, during the working of a field, record the position data of the
GPS receiver.

1. Drive to the start point of the recording.

2. Switch "Record GPS track" "on".
→ Message window 54027 is displayed.
3. Confirm the message and travel to the end of the recording.
→ The GPS position data is recorded.
4. When you have reached the end point, switch "Record GPS track" "off".
→ Recording of the GPS track is completed.
→ The GPS track on the terminal is overwritten.
→ The GPS track can be played back or exported.

GPS track playback

The switch for switching on GPS track playback is password protected.
1. Record a GPS track or import a GPS track.
2. Switch "GPS simulation" on.
→ The password query is displayed.
3. Enter the password and confirm the entry.
→ The GPS track is played back.

Repeat simulation
You can play back the GPS track once or in an infinite loop.
Switch "Repeat simulation" "on".
→ The GPS track is automatically played back again from the beginning
once the end has been reached.

NOTE

Only GPS tracks of type NMEA 0183 can be imported.

148 / 366
 6 Speed, position and geometry

Import GPS track

1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.
 The GPS track must be saved in the root directory of the flash drive.
 The GPS track must have the file type "nmea" or "log".
2. Press the "Import" button.
→ A selection list with the GPS tracks on the flash drive is displayed.
3. Select a GPS track.
4. Start the import by pressing "Back".
→ Message window 54028 is displayed.
5. Confirm the message.
→ The GPS track is imported.
→ The GPS track on the terminal is overwritten.

Export GPS track

1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.
2. Press the "Export" button.
→ The GPS track is automatically saved in the root directory on the flash
drive.
→ The GPS track has the file type ".log".
→ The GPS track is be of type NMEA 0183.

149 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

This chapter introduces you to the following topics:
• Operating one or more ISOBUS implements with the terminal ( Chap-
ter 7.3) ,
• Assigning implement functions to an AUX control ( Chapter 7.4.1),
• Connecting an implement for the first time ( Chapter 7.1.3),
• Resetting the terminal after updating the implement software ( Chap-
ter 7.5.2),
• Setting the UT number ( Chapter 7.2),
• Special settings, if the terminal it is not being used for implement operation
( Chapter 7.3.9).

150 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

Introduc- The app for the operation of ISOBUS implements is Universal Terminal or UT.
tion
The CCI 1200 has two UT apps, CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B:
→ You can operate two ISOBUS implements.

The CCI 800 has one UT app, CCI.UT A:

→ You can operate one ISOBUS implement.

CCI 1200 CCI 800

CCI 1200
Connecting up to 20 implements
Ten ISOBUS implements can connect with each of CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B.

One implement can be operated per UT app. The implement must be in standard view.
The other implements are in mini view and must be moved to standard view for opera-
tion.

Sharing implements over CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B

In practice you will operate one or at most two implements with the terminal, e.g. a
front fertilizer tank and a towed seed drill implement. Assign the two implements to
CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B and open both UT apps in standard view:
→ Both implements can be operated.

CCI 800
Connecting up to ten implements
Ten implements can connect with CCI.UT A.

The implement displayed in standard view can be operated. The other implements are in
mini view and must be moved to standard view for operation.

151 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.1 Setting up for operation

Prior prepa-
ration
In app management switch CCI.UT A "on" ( Chapter 4.2.2).

In the ISOBUS settings, switch the Universal Terminal ISOBUS function

"on" ( Chapter 4.2.3)
This concludes the pre-settings.

7.1.1 Setting the UT number

Set the UT number as follows:
1. Open the operating screen
"CCI.UT A":

2. Press the "UT number" button.

→ The "UT number" operating screen is displayed.

3. Enter UT number "1".

4. End the process with "Back".

→ Message window 50995 is displayed.

5. Confirm the entry.

→ CCI.UT restarts.
→ CCI.UT logs in to the ISOBUS using the new UT number.

6. If you have switched on CCI.UT B in app management, repeat steps 4 to

7 for CCI.UT B. Enter UT number "2".

7. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The settings are saved.

152 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.1.2 Connecting the AUX control

Connect the AUX control to the ISOBUS.
→ You require cable A.

1. Connect cable A to connector A on the terminal.

2. Insert the in-cab plug of the AUX control in the "InCab" coupling on cable
A.
3. Plug the In-cab coupling of the AUX control in the In-cab panel connector
of the tractor or the self-propelled implement.
→ The AUX control connects with CCI.UT.
→ The operating screen of the AUX control is displayed.
→ Implement functions are not yet assigned to the operating elements of
the AUX control:

153 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.1.3 Connecting the implement

If you connect an implement to the ISOBUS, the implement connects with
CCI.UT.
→ The implement can only be used if the connection is correctly made.

If you have connected an AUX control, assign the operating elements of the
AUX control to the implement functions ( Chapter 7.4.1).

Object Pool
The graphical user interface of an ISOBUS implement is referred to as an Ob-
ject Pool. The Object Pool contains all the operating screens of an ISOBUS
implement.

The operating screens consist of display and operating elements:

• Text and pictograms
• Buttons
• Input fields
• Selection lists etc.
The operating screens are displayed in CCI.UT. The display elements provide informa-
tion and the operating elements are used for implement operation.
If an ISOBUS implement connects with CCI.UT for the first time, the implement uploads
the Object Pool into the UT.
Dependent on the size of the Object Pool, the upload may take several minutes. The im-
plement cannot be used during uploading:
→ Start using the implement only once its graphical user interface is displayed.
CCI.UT saves the Object Pool on the terminal. If the implement connects with CCI.UT
again at a later point in time, CCI.UT uses the saved object pool.
→ Uploading is not necessary.
→ The implement can be used immediately.

154 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.2 Settings

Open the operating screen

"CCI.UT A":

You have the following operating options:

UT number
CCI.UT logs on to the ISOBUS using the new UT number.
Set the UT number as described below.

Assigned UT numbers
Check which UT numbers are already assigned before you set the UT
number for CCI.UT.

AUX assignment
Assign implement functions to the operating elements of an AUX control
( Chapter 7.4.1) or terminal functions.

Connected implements
The implements connected with CCI.UT are displayed ( Chapter 7.5.1).

Saved implements
After an implement software update, delete the implement from the termi-
nal ( Chapter 7.5.2).

155 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

NOTE

UTs with the same UT number cannot connect to the ISOBUS.

The operation of an ISOBUS implement is not possible.

The CCI 800/CCI 1200 and a second ISOBUS terminal are connected to the
ISOBUS:
Ensure that CCI.UT A, CCI.UT B and other UTs connected to the ISOBUS
have different UT numbers.

Proceed as follows to display no longer available UT numbers:

1. Open the operating screen
"CCI.UT A":

2. Press the "Assigned UT numbers" button.

→ The list of no longer available UT numbers is displayed.

Now enter the UT number:

3. Press the "UT number" button.
→ The "UT number" operating screen is displayed.

4. Enter an unassigned UT number and confirm the entry.

5. End the process with "Back".

→ Message window 50995 is displayed.

6. Confirm the entry.

→ CCI.UT restarts.
→ CCI.UT logs on to the ISOBUS using the new UT number.

156 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

UT number
CCI.UT logs on to the ISOBUS using the new UT number.
→ CCI.UT is visible for implements and AUX controls under this UT number.
→ The implement decides with which UT it connects based on the UT num-
ber.

Implements connect first to UT number "1".

If no UT is logged onto the ISOBUS with the UT number "1", then the implement sear-
ches for the next highest UT number.
The implement saves the UT number and connects to this UT when it next connects.

AUX controls only connect with a UT with the UT number "1".

7.3 Using the CCI.UT correctly

The following sections describe how you use CCI.UT optimally for the following
applications (among others):
• Two implements are to be operated simultaneously
• Two or more implements are to be operated in alternation
• One implement is to be operated with the AUX control
• No implement is to be operated

Before rea- • Switch an app on and off in App management ( Chapter 4.2.2):
ding any
further...

• Change the UT number of CCI.UT in the CCI.UT settings ( Chapter 7.2):

• Drag and drop an app from mini view to standard view ( Chapter 3.3).

157 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.1 One implement, one terminal

• The CCI 800/CCI 1200 is the only ISOBUS terminal.
• You want to operate no more than one ISOBUS implement with the termi-
nal.

Set the terminal as follows:

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A "on" and switch CCI.UT B "off".

2. In the settings of CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.
3. Open CCI.UT A in standard view.
4. Connect the implement to the ISOBUS.
→ The implement connects with CCI.UT A.

158 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.2 Two implements in an alternating manner, one terminal

• The CCI 800/CCI 1200 is the only ISOBUS terminal.
• You want to operate two ISOBUS implements alternately with the terminal,
e.g. a towed seed drill implement with a fertilizer tank.

Set the terminal as follows:

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A "on" and switch CCI.UT B "off".

2. In the settings of CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.
3. Open CCI.UT A in standard view.
4. Connect the implements to the ISOBUS.
→ Both implements connect with CCI.UT A.

5. Open the implement you want to operate in standard view.

159 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.3 Two implements simultaneously, one terminal

• The CCI 1200 is the only ISOBUS terminal.
• You want to operate two ISOBUS implements simultaneously with the ter-
minal, e.g. a towed seed drill implement with a fertilizer tank.

Connect one implement to CCI.UT A and the other implement to CCI.UT B

and open both UTs in standard view.
→ Both implements can be operated.

Set the terminal as follows:

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B "on".

2. In the settings of CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.
3. In the settings of CCI.UT B set the UT number to 2.
4. Open CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B in standard view.
5. Connect the implements to the ISOBUS.
→ Both implements connect with CCI.UT A.

6. Move an implement to CCI.UT B ( Chapter 7.5.3).

160 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

NOTE

Not all ISOBUS implements can be moved to another UT.

If this is the case, dividing of the two implements between CCI.UT A and
CCI.UT B is not possible. The two implements cannot be operated simultane-
ously.
Connect both implements with CCI.UT A ( Chapter 7.3.2).
→ The two implements must be operated alternately.

NOTE

Only one implement can be operated with the CCI 800.

7.3.4 Changing the display positions

CCI 1200 You want to change the position of the two implements in standard view:

Press the "Layout" button.

→ The apps change position in standard view

CCI 800 The CCI 800 does not have this feature.

161 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.5 Displaying the implement in maxi view

CCI 1200 You want to display the operating screen of the implement in maxi view:

Press and hold the "Layout" button for 2 seconds.

→ The right app is displayed in maxi view.
→ The left app is displayed in mini view.

CCI 800 Maxi view is not available in the CCI 800.

162 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.6 One implement, one AUX control

• The CCI 800/CCI 1200 is the only ISOBUS terminal.
• You want to operate no more than one ISOBUS implement with the termi-
nal.
• You want to use an AUX control to operate the implement.

Set the terminal as follows:

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A "on" and switch CCI.UT B "off".

2. In the settings of CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.
3. Connect the AUX control and the implement to the ISOBUS.
4. Carry out the AUX assignment ( Chapter 7.4.1).

163 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.7 Two implements simultaneously, one AUX control

• The CCI 1200 is the only ISOBUS terminal.
• You want to operate and display both ISOBUS implements in standard view
and with the terminal, e.g. a fertilizer tank with a towed seed drill imple-
ment.
• You want to be able to operate functions of both implements with the AUX
control.

Set the terminal as follows:

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B "on".

2. In the settings of CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.
3. In the settings of CCI.UT B set the UT number to 2.
4. Open CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B in standard view.
5. Connect the AUX control and the implement to the ISOBUS.
→ Both implements and the AUX control connect with CCI.UT A.

6. Move an implement to CCI.UT B ( Chapter 7.5.3).

7. Carry out the AUX assignment ( Chapter 7.4.1).

164 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

NOTE

You have set up the terminal as described in this section.

→ CCI.UT A has UT number 1.
→ The implement connected to CCI.UT A can be operated with the AUX con-
trol.

The implement connected to CCI.UT B can only be operated with the AUX
control, if the implement supports dividing over two UTs:
• The graphical user interface is displayed in CCI.UT B
• The list of implement functions is made available to CCI.UT A
→ The implement performs this process automatically.

If the implement connected to CCI.UT B does not support dividing over two
UTs, the implement cannot be operated with the AUX control. Possibly the
other implement may support the sharing of function list and user interface:
Switch the implements over between CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B and try
again.

If neither of the two implements supports the division of function list and u-
ser interface, you have the following option:
Connect both implements with CCI.UT A ( Chapter 7.3.8).
→ Both implements can be operated with the AUX control.
→ The two implements can only be displayed and operated in an alter-
nating manner in standard view.

NOTE

Only one implement can be operated with the CCI 800.

165 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.8 Two implements in alternation, one AUX control

• The CCI 800/CCI 1200 is the only ISOBUS terminal.
• You need only ever operate and display one of the two ISOBUS implements
in standard view on the terminal, e.g. either the towed seed drill imple-
ment or the fertilizer tank.
• You want to be able to operate functions of both implements with the AUX
control.

Set the terminal as follows:

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A "on" and switch CCI.UT B "off".

2. In the settings of CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.
3. Open CCI.UT A in standard view.
4. Connect the AUX control and the implement to the ISOBUS.
→ Both implements and the AUX control connect with CCI.UT A.

5. Carry out the AUX assignment ( Chapter 7.4.1).

166 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.3.9 No implement operation

• You are using the CCI 800/CCI 1200 and a second ISOBUS Terminal.
• You do not want to operate any ISOBUS implement with the
CCI 800/CCI 1200.

1. In app management switch CCI.UT A and CCI.UT B "off".

2. In the "ISOBUS settings" operating screen switch the "Universal Terminal"
"off".
→ CCI.UT no longer connects to the ISOBUS.

7.4 Working with an AUX control

Often and regularly required functions of an ISOBUS implement or the termi-
nal can in the main be executed more quickly using a joystick, a toggle switch
strip or some other AUX control (AUX).

7.4.1 Assigning implement functions to the auxiliary control

AUX
Implement functions can be assigned to the operating elements of the AUX
control. You make the AUX assignments in the CCI.UT settings.

167 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

NOTE

The implement saves the AUX assignment.

The AUX assignment must only be performed once.
The assignment is available again after a restart of the implement and the
AUX control.

NOTE

An AUX control requires a UT number "1".

The AUX control only connects to the terminal if this has logged on to the
ISOBUS using the UT number "1".
In CCI.UT A set the UT number to 1.

Prior prepa-
ration
Perform setting up. ( Chapter 7.1)

1. Open the "AUX Assignment" screen:

a: Manufacturer of the AUX control

b: AUX control
c: Selection list of the operating elements

168 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

2. Switch "Editing mode" "on".

→ The selection list with the operating elements of the AUX control is
displayed (c).

3a. Press the operating element on the AUX control.

→ The selection list of the available implement functions is displayed.

ATTENTION:
With some AUX controls, the list of implement functions opens upon press-
ing the operating element.
Proceed as described in step 6b.
Otherwise continue with step 7.

3b. Press the "+" in the operating element row.

→ The selection list of the available implement functions is displayed.

d: ISOBUS implement
e: List of implement functions

4. Select the implement function.

5. Press "Back" to return to the operating element selection list.

→ The implement function is assigned to the operating element.
→ The list displays the operating element and the implement function.

169 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

6. To assign functions to other operating elements, repeat steps 6 to 8.

7. Press the "Settings" button.

→ Editing mode is switched off.
→ The "Settings" operating screen is closed.
→ AUX assignment is ended.
→ The implement functions can be executed with the AUX control.

Checks Check the AUX assignment as follows:

1. Open the operating screen of the AUX control in standard view.
→ The AUX assignment is displayed.

2. Change to the AUX control in all operating levels and check the AUX as-
signments on the terminal.

170 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

NOTE

No changes to the AUX assignments can be made in the operating

screen of the AUX control.
To make changes to the AUX assignment, switch to the "AUX assignment"
operating screen and switch editing mode "on".

7.4.2 Assigning implement terminal functions to the AUX con-

trol

Prior prepa-
ration
In the ISOBUS settings, switch on the AUX-N Terminal Functions. ( Chap-
ter 4.2.3)

NOTE

Terminal functions can only be called with an AUX-N type AUX con-
trol.
Check the data sheet of the AUX control to determine whether it is of
type AUX-N.

NOTE

The terminal saves the AUX assignment.

The AUX assignment must only be performed once.
The AUX assignment is available again after a restart of the terminal and the
AUX control.

171 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

You can call the following terminal functions with an AUX control:

Picto-
Terminal function
gram

Change layout
Change the position of apps in standard view.

 In the Maxi-View layout and on the CCI 800, the active app is moved to
the Mini-View.

Show the camera image

Use this function if CCI.Cam is not visible or is only visible in the Mini-View
and you want to show the camera image briefly.
Press the "Show image" operating element.
→ The camera image selected in CCI.Cam is displayed in the foreground.
Press the operating element again.
→ The window containing the camera image is closed.
Change to the next camera image
Use this function if you have connected several cameras to the terminal
( Chapter 5.1.3,  Chapter 5.1.4,  Chapter 5.1.5).
Press the operating element "Display next image".
→ The image from the camera with the next number is displayed.

Change between manual and automatic Section Control

Switch on marking of the worked area

Press the "Switch on marking" operating element.
→ The worked area is marked.
Start/pause field boundary recording
Press the "Start recording" operating element.
→ The field boundary is recorded.
Press the operating element again.
→ The recording is paused.

 If you want to mark with the other outer edge of the implement or to
record inner field boundaries instead of outer field boundaries, open the
"Record field boundary" input dialogue ( Chapter 9.3.2).

End field boundary recording

Press the "Stop recording" operating element.
→ The field boundary is saved.
→ Small gaps are automatically closed

172 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

Picto-
Terminal function
gram

Record straight track

The track is the straight line between the start and end points of the record-
ing.
1. Drive to the start point of the recording.
2. Press the "Record straight track" button and drive to the end point of the
track.
→ Point A is drawn in.
→ The track is recorded.
3. Press the operating element again.
→ Point B is drawn in.
→ The track is saved.
Record curve
The track has the shape of the path driven between the start and end of the
recording.
1. Drive to the start point of the recording.
2. Press the "Record curve" button and drive to the end point of the track.
→ The track is recorded.
3. Press the operating element again.
→ The track is saved.
Start/pause headland recording ( Chapter 9.4.3)
Press the "Record" button and drive to the end point of the headland.
→ The headland is recorded.

 If you want to change the recording settings, open the "Individual

headland" input dialogue ( Chapter 9.4.3).

End headland recording

End the recording.
→ The headland is saved.
Lock headland
A locked headland cannot be worked.
Press the "Lock headland" operating element.
→ The headland is displayed with orange hatching.
→ Sections are automatically switched off in the headland.
→ The inner field can be worked.
Press the operating element again.
→ The headland is unlocked.
→ Headland and inner field can be worked.

173 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

Picto-
Terminal function
gram

Change to the next boom

Press the "Change the boom" operating element.
→ The next boom is selected and visually highlighted.
→ The worked area of the selected boom is displayed.
Change to the next application map
A task can contain several application maps. Only one application map can
be displayed in the map view.
Press the "Change application map" operating element.
→ You change between the task application maps.
Change direction of travel
If reverse gear detection with GPS is switched on, you can manually change
the direction of travel. For example, this may be necessary if reverse gear is
not automatically detected.

Move track to vehicle position( Chapter 9.5.4)

Press the "Move track" operating element.
→ The track is moved to the actual position of the tractor.

How to assign functions to the operating elements of an AUX control unit is

described in  Chapter 7.4.1, steps 1 to 10.

You can identify the Terminal functions in the selection list by means of the
pictogram in the left column.

174 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.4.3 Delete AUX assignment

To delete the assignment of an individual operating element, proceed as fol-
lows:

1. Switch "Editing mode" "on".

All operating elements of the AUX control are displayed in the selection list.
2. Press the "-" in the operating element button.
→ The assignment is deleted.
→ The implement function can no longer be executed with the operating
element.

3. Switch "Editing mode" "off".

175 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.4.4 Delete all AUX assignments

To delete the assignment of all operating elements, proceed as follows:
1. Switch "Editing mode" "on".

2. Press the button "Delete all AUX assignments".

→ The assignment of all operating elements is deleted.
→ The implement can no longer be operated with the AUX control.

3. Switch "Editing mode" "off".

7.5 Managing implements

The implements connected to CCI.UT can be displayed or deleted.

Open the CCI.UT settings:

176 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.5.1 Displaying implement details

The implements connected with CCI.UT are displayed.
→ The displayed details are only of interest for servicing.

Connected implements
1. Press the button "Connected implements".
→ The "Connected implements" list is displayed.
2. End the process with "Back".

Connected implements
Additional details are displayed for the implements connected with CCI.UT:

1: Manufacturer
2: Pool number and peerHandle are implement
connection data and of no interest to you as a
user.
3: The Object Pool status is "Active" and se-
lectable, the button is green:
→ The implement is connected with CCI.UT.
→ The implement is shown in standard view
and can be operated.

4: The Object Pool status is "inactive", but selectable:

→ The implement is connected with CCI.UT.
→ The implement is displayed in mini view.
→ To operate the implement, move it into the standard view.
5: The Object Pool status is "inactive" and non-selectable:
→ The implement is connected with CCI.UT.
→ The implement is not displayed.
→ Implement functions can be assigned to an AUX control.
6: The Object Pool status is "inactive" and there is "No implement available":
→ The implement is connected with CCI.UT.
→ The implement is not displayed.
→ The implement can no longer be operated with the terminal or the AUX control.

177 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.5.2 Saved implements

Saved implements
If an ISOBUS implement connects with CCI.UT for the first time, the imple-
ment uploads its graphical user interface, the Object Pool into the UT. CCI.UT
saves the implement on the terminal.
→ When it is reconnected, uploading of the Object Pool is not necessary.

The Object Pools of all implements that are

saved on the terminal are displayed in the list of
saved implements.

CAUTION!

After an update of the implement software, the implement GUI saved

on the terminal is not always automatically updated.
The terminal shows you the GUI saved on the terminal and not the new GUI:
• The implement saved on the terminal and the implement software do not
match
• Malfunctions of the implement are possible
• New implement functions are not available

After an implement software update, delete the implement from the terminal:
1. Disconnect the implement from the ISOBUS.
2. Delete the implement from the terminal as described in this chapter.
3. Connect the implement to the ISOBUS.
→ The implement connects with CCI.UT.
→ The new graphical user interface is uploaded to the UT.
→ CCI.UT displays the new graphical user interface of the implement.

178 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

Delete im- To delete an implement, proceed as follows:

plement

1. Open the selection list "Saved

implements":

2. Press the button with the implement and keep the button pressed.
→ A context menu is displayed.

3. Press "Delete".
→ The implement is deleted without a confirmation query.

4. End the process with "Back".

5. If both CCI.UTs are switched on, repeat steps 3 to 7 for the other
CCI.UT.

NOTE

Sometimes it is not possible to unambiguously identify the imple-

ment in the list.
Then you will have to delete all implements from the terminal.
Press the "Delete all implements" button.
→ The implements are deleted without a confirmation query.

179 / 366
 7 ISOBUS implement and AUX control

7.5.3 Moving an implement to another UT

Some ISOBUS implements can be moved to another UT at the press of a but-
ton. In general, this function is contained in the ISOBUS settings of the imple-
ment.

Check in the operating instructions of your implement, whether this func-

tion is available.

Using this function you can operate the implement with the desired UT:
• In the left screen, both implements are connected to CCI.UT A.
→ The implements can only be operated in alternation.

• In the right screen, one implement is connected with CCI.UT A, the other
implement is connected with CCI.UT B.
→ The implements can only be operated simultaneously.

180 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8 Fields and tasks

This chapter introduces you to the following topics:
• Importing fields, tasks or application maps in ISO-XML or shape format
( Chapter 8.3.1),
• Managing fields and creating tasks ( Chapter 8.7.2),
• Exporting tasks and reports ( Chapter 8.3.3),
• Use Search, Filter and context menu ( Chapter 8.2).

Introduc- CCI.Control is the interface between the FMIS and the implement. Use
tion
CCI.Control to manage fields and document your work.

From the home page, you have access to all CCI.Control functions via the
burger menu and 4 tiles:
1: In the burger menu, import and
export fields, application maps
and tasks, create reports, delete
stored data or activate the Field
Finder ( Chapter 8.3)
2: in the field list manage fields and
create tasks ( Chapter 8.4)
3: Select a customer and manage his
fields ( Chapter 8.5)
4: Select an operation and manage
the fields on which this operation
is to be carried out ( Chap-
ter 8.6)
5: Display and edit the active task
( Chapter 8.7)

181 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.1 Setting up for operation

Prior prepa- For some functions of CCI.Control, e.g. import and export - you need the li-
ration
cence for Task Control ( Chapter 4.3.3).

In app management switch CCI.Control "on" ( Chapter 4.2.2).

Switch on the ISOBUS function Task Controller in ISOBUS settings

( Chapter 4.2.3) and set a Task Controller number.

Set up the tractor, implement and GPS ( Chapter 6.2,  Chapter 6.4,
 Chapter 6.6).

1. Open the CCI.Control settings:

a: Display a message when entering

a known field
b: A nutrient sensor controls the ap-
plication rate of the implement us-
ing Peer Control
c: CCI.Assist
d: Automatically create field bound-
ary
e: In map view, display all fields
within a 10 km radius

2. Activate the required functions.

3. Press the "Settings" button on the start screen.

→ Setting up is ended.
→ The "Settings" operating screen is closed.

182 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Adjusting You have the following setting options:

CCI.Control
Automatic Field Finder ( Chapter 8.8)
Field Finder continuously compares the GPS coordinates of the fields in the
field list with the location of the tractor or the self-propelled implement.
→ When you enter a field stored on the terminal, the Field Finder opens a
list of tasks associated with the field.

Peer Control
A nutrient sensor can control the application quantity of an ISOBUS imple-
ment. The setpoints of the nutrient sensor replace the setpoints specified in
an application map.
Peer Control is switched on in the factory.
Only switch off Peer Control, if an  error message 51022 is displayed
when connecting an implement.

CCI.Assist ( Chapter 8.7.9)

If a task is running, CCI.Assist shows additional information about the tank
or loading space as well as about the field.

Automatically create field boundary

If you worked the outer area during the first travel around the field perime-
ter, you can enable automatic creation of the field boundary. Manual calcula-
tion of the field boundary ( Chapter 9.3.1) is no longer necessary.

Switch "on" "Automatically create field boundary".

→ The field boundary is calculated after the first journey around the pe-
rimeter.
→ The field boundary is indicated in orange.
→ Small gaps are automatically closed.

Display all fields

All fields within a 10 km radius are displayed in map view. If you press on a
field, a selection list is displayed with the tasks belonging to the field.
→ You can select a task and start it.

183 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.2 Search, Filter and context menus

Use the search and filter function of CCI.Control when your lists have lots of
items and are therefore not very clear:
• Field list
• Task list
• Product list
• Driver list
• Operation list

The lists have a context menu for direct processing of the items:
→ You can use the context menu to edit, copy, delete or export the individual
list items.

8.2.1 Search and Filter

Press the "Search" button in any list - e.g. the field list - press the "Search"
button.
→ The search window is displayed.

1: Input field for free text search.

→ The scope of application is con-
text-dependent. In most lists,
the search is applied to the
names of the list items, for ex-
ample, to the field names in the
field list.
2: Filter
→ The number of possible filters is
context-dependent.

184 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Once you have entered a search term or selected a filter, the appearance of
the search window changes:
1: Free text search input field with
active search term
2: Inactive filters
3: Active filter
→ Button is red.
→ Display of the filter instead of
the criterion.
4: "Search" button
→ Button is red, i.e. free text
search and/or filters are active.
→ Press the button to open or
close the search window.
5: "Press "Delete button
→ The search term / filter is de-
leted.

Search Free text search allows you to search for any character string. The search is
applied to the names of the list items:
1. Press the "Search" button.
→ The free text search input field is displayed.

2. Enter the search term and confirm your entry.

→ The search term is applied to the list while you are touching the list.
→ Only items that contain the search term are displayed in the list.
→ To indicate an active search, the "Search" button has a red back-
ground.

3. Press the "Search" button.

→ Repeatedly pressing the button opens and closes the search window.

4. Press the "Delete" button next to the free text search.

→ The search term is deleted.
→ All list items are displayed.

185 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Filter Dependent on the list, one or more filter categories are offered. You can se-
lect multiple filter categories and combine them with the free text search to
limit the search result:
1. Press the "Search" button.
→ The input field for the free text search and - where available - the fil-
ter categories are displayed.

2. Select a filter category.

→ A selection list is displayed.

3. Select an item from the list.

4. Press "Back" to end setting of the filter.

→ Only items that fulfil the filter criteria are displayed in the search re-
sult.
→ The "Search" button has a red background: at least one filter is ac-
tive.
→ The filter category button has a red background and is labelled with
the selected filter.

5. Press the "Search" button.

→ Repeatedly pressing the button opens and closes the search window.

6. Press the "Delete" button next to the filter.

→ The filter is deleted.
→ All list items are displayed.

NOTE

Free text search and filter remain active

In some lists, the search term and filter remain active even if the list is
closed. You can see this by the background colour of the "Search" button:
→ The "Search" button has a red background when the search or filter is ac-
tive.

Manually reset the search term and filters.

186 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.2.2 Context menu

In any list, such as the field list,

press and hold the button of a list
item.
→ The context menu is displayed.

In most lists, you have one or more of the following editing options:

Edit
In most lists, you can edit the names of the list items, for example, the field
names in the field list.
1. Press the "Edit" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the names or text and confirm the entry.

Copy
Copy a list item.
An empty copy is created, i.e. the contents of the list item are not copied.
For example, a copy of a field does not include the customers, farms or
tasks of the copied field.
→ You must add them.

Press the button "Copy".

→ A copy of the list item is added to the list.
→ The name of the copy has the suffix "_#1".

187 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Delete
Delete the list item.

Press the "Delete" button.

→ The list item is deleted without a confirmation query.

The deletion can be undone.

After deletion, a message window appears for approximately 3 seconds,
with the "Undo" button on the right edge.
Press the "Undo" button.
→ The list item is not deleted.

Export ( Chapter 8.4.1)

This function is only available in the field list.

8.3 Burger menu

The burger menu on the CCI.Control home page provides the following oper-
ating options:

Import ( Chapter 8.3.1)

You can import fields, customers, tasks, and application maps in ISO-XML
format or fields and application maps in shape format.

Export ( Chapter 8.3.2)

For further processing with an FMIS you can save data including the master
data, the totals and the location-based data to a flash drive or send it to
agrirouter.

Report ( Chapter 8.3.3)

A report summarises all relevant information about a task. You can save re-
ports to a flash drive or send them to agrirouter.

Delete ( Chapter 8.3.4)

You can delete fields, customers, operations, tasks, or application maps, or
empty the agrirouter inbox.

Field Finder
Start Field Finder. Field Finder opens a list of tasks associated with the field
in which you are currently located.

188 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.3.1 Import
Import fields, customers, tasks and application maps. The data must be in
ISO-XML or shape format.

NOTE

When importing, the data stored on the terminal is not deleted or

overwritten.
Newly imported data is highlighted with an asterisk* in the field and task
lists.

NOTE

No import of duplicates.
You cannot re-import master data or tasks that are already stored on the
terminal.
A duplicate exists if field, task, customer, farm, operation and product of
both records are identical.

Prior prepa-
ration
Save the data on a the flash drive or send the data to the terminal using
agrirouter.

Connect the flash drive to the terminal or connect the terminal using agri-
router ( Chapter 4.3.5).

1. Open the burger menu.

2. Press the "Import" button.

→ The "Import data" selection list with the "Inbox" and "Flash Drive"
tabs is displayed.

3. Select a tab.
→ The records on the USB stick or in the agrirouter inbox are displayed.
→ Brief information about the content is displayed below the record
name.
→ The pictogram on the left indicates whether it is ISO-XML or shape
data.

4. Select a record.
→ The "Import" selection list is displayed.

189 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Importing ISO-XML
Data In ISO-XML format can contain tasks including fields and application
maps, or just fields or application maps.

NOTE

Data in ISO-XML format can contain multiple tasks, fields, and appli-
cation maps.

NOTE

A task in ISO-XML format can contain multiple application maps.

If a task has the ISO-XML format Grid Type 2, it can contain multiple appli-
cation maps.
Assign an implement to each application map before starting the task.
( Chapter 8.7.8)

Tasks in ISO-XML format Grid Type 1 or Polygon only contain one application
map.

Tasks
5. Select the "Tasks" list item and confirm the selection.
→ The tasks are imported including the contained fields and application
maps.
→ Newly imported data is highlighted with an asterisk* in the field and
task lists, and in the map storage.

Fields, ap-
plication 5. Select the "Fields list item and confirm the selection.
maps → The fields are imported.
→ Newly imported data is highlighted with an asterisk* in the field list.

or

5. Select the "Maps" list item and confirm the entry.

→ The application maps are imported.
→ Newly imported data is highlighted with an asterisk* in the map stor-
age.

190 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Importing a shape application map

You can import a shape application map or a zip archive with multiple shape
application maps.
After the import, the "Task" detailed view ( Chapter 8.7) is displayed:
→ You can edit the task properties or start the task.

Steps 1 to 4:  S.189
5. Select the "Application map" list item and confirm the selection.
→ The "Import application map" operating screen is displayed.

Only perform steps 6 to 8 if the buttons display no or incorrect values:

6. Press the "Column" button and select a value from the list.

7. Press the "Physical variable" button and select a value from the list.

8. Press the "Unit" button and select a value from the list.
→ Your entries are summarised under the buttons in the "Value range"
field.

9. Check your entries and repeat steps 6 to 8 as necessary.

Steps 10 to 13 are optional.

→ You can link the application map and task to a customer and/or operation
directly during import:
10. Press the "Customer" button.
→ The customer list is displayed.

11. Select a customer and press "back" to confirm the selection.

12. Press the "Operation" button.

→ The operation list is displayed.

191 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

13. Select an operation and press "Back" to confirm the selection.

14. Press the "Import" Action button.

→ The application maps are added to the map storage.
→ A task is created for each application map.
→ The tasks are not linked to fields.
→ You can find the tasks in the field list under the entry "Without field".
→ If you have linked the tasks to a customer in step 11, you will find
the tasks in the customer list ( Chapter 8.5).
→ If you have linked the tasks in 13 to an operation, you will find the
tasks in the operation list ( Chapter 8.6).
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

The selected values are applied to all imported application maps.

If you are importing a zip archive with multiple shape application maps, the
following applies:
• The values selected in steps 6 to 8 for the column, the physical variable
and the units are applied to all application maps.
• The customer selected in step 11 is linked to the automatically created
tasks.
• The operation selected in step 13 is linked to the automatically created
tasks.

NOTE

No field boundary is created during import.

The application map is not linked to a field and no field boundary is calcu-
lated.
→ However, you can also process the task for the application map without a
field and field boundary.
→ If the field including the field boundary is already saved on the terminal,
you can link the field to the field in the "task" detailed view ( Chap-
ter 8.7.3).

NOTE

Shape application maps can only be processed if the shape and con-
tent meet the specifications.
See the appendix Application maps.

192 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

NOTE

A shape application map always comprises a number of files :

• .dbf,
• .shp,
• .shx and optional
• .prj.
→ If all the files of the shape application map are not on the flash drive,
CCI.Control cannot perform the import.

Copy all files of the shape application map onto the flash drive.

Setpoint table
The setpoint table of a shape application map contains
• one or more columns and
• the rows with the setpoints.
When creating the shape application map, give the columns meaningful names. We rec-
ommend the use of product and unit, e.g. "Compost (t)".
Unit selection when importing
It is not apparent from a shape application map which units are to be used, i.e. whether
the product application quantity should be measured in l/ha or kg/m 2.
The units are specified in two steps when importing the shape application map. First
make a pre-selection and then select the units to be used:
• Volume/area • Distance
o l/ha o mm
o m3/ha o cm
o … o dm
• Mass/area o m
o …
o kg/ha
o t/ha • Percent
o g/m2 o %
o mg/m2 o ‰
o … o ppm
• Number/area o …
o 1/m2
o 1/ha
o …
Therefore if you want to apply the product in t/ha, select
• mass/area in step 7 of the import process and
• then in step 8, t/ha.

193 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Importing a shape field boundary

The import of a shape field boundary ends in the "Field" detailed view
( Chapter 8.4.2).
→ A task is created and added to the field.
→ You can edit the field properties or start the task in the detailed view.

New field You can automatically create a new field using the field boundary:

Steps 1 to 4:  S.189
5. Select the "Field boundary" list item and confirm the selection.
→ The "Import Field boundary" screen is displayed.

6. Press the "Import" Action button.

→ A new field is created.
→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed.

Existing You can assign the field boundary to a field from the field list:
field
Steps 1 to 4:  S.189
5. Select the "Field boundary" list item and confirm the selection.
→ The "Import Field boundary" screen is displayed.

6. Press the "Link field" button.

→ The selection list "Select field" is displayed.

7. Select a field.
→ The "Import Field boundary" screen is displayed.

8. Press the "Import" Action button.

→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

The existing field boundary will be overwritten

If you link the imported field boundary with a field that already has a field
boundary, the old field boundary is overwritten.

194 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.3.2 Export
If you want to further process the fields, tasks, master data, totals and loca-
tion-based data stored on the terminal using an FMIS, you can export the
data.

You can export the data to a flash drive or send it to agrirouter. You can sel-
ect which data is to be exported:
• All data
• Changed data
• Data with an operation
• Data of one customer
• Data relating to one field
• Data relating to one task

Saving to a Export the data to a flash drive as follows:

flash drive
1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Press the button "Export".

→ The "Export" selection list is displayed.

4. Press on the "Flash drive" button.

→ The "Export" selection list is displayed.

195 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Sending to Send data to agrirouter as follows:

agrirouter
1. Open the burger menu.

2. Press the button "Export".

→ The "Export" selection list is displayed.

3. Press the "agrirouter" button.

→ The selection list "Send to:" is
displayed.

4. Select the destination points to

which the data is to be sent and
confirm the entry.
→ The "Export" selection list is
displayed.
→ The tasks are sent to the des-
tinations.
→ The tasks are not deleted from
the terminal.

NOTE

If agrirouter is not switched on, this function is unavailable.

Switch agrirouter on prior to the export ( Chapter 4.3.5).

NOTE

If the terminal is not connected to the Internet, the tasks cannot be

sent.
The tasks are saved in the outbox of the agrirouter.
Manually send the tasks in the outbox ( Chapter 4.3.5).

196 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

All data
5. Select "All data".
→ All data saved on the terminal, is exported including the master data,
totals and location-based data.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the Data is saved in the directory
\TASKDATA on the flash drive.

Changed
data 5. Select "Changed data".
→ All data that has changed since the last export is exported, including
the master data, totals and location-based data.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the Data is saved in the directory
\TASKDATA on the flash drive.

Fields
5. Select "More".

6. Select "Fields".
→ All data that belongs to the selected fields is exported, including the
master data, totals and location-based data.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the data is saved in the directory
\TASKDATA\Fields_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.

Customers
5. Select "More".

6. Select "Customers".
→ All data that belongs to the selected Customers is exported, including
the master data, totals and location-based data.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the data is saved in the directory
\TASKDATA\Customers_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.

197 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Operations
5. Select "More".

6. Select "Operations".
→ All data that belongs to the selected Operations is exported, including
the master data, totals and location-based data.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the data is saved in the directory
\TASKDATA\Operations_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.

Tasks
5. Select "More".

6. Select "Tasks".
→ All data that belongs to the selected tasks is exported, including the
master data, totals and location-based data.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the Data is saved in the directory
\TASKDATA on the flash drive.

NOTE

No data is deleted on the terminal during export.

NOTE

Data in \TASKDATA is automatically backed up.

If the directory \TASKDATA on the flash drive is not empty, the data saved
there is moved to the directory \TASKDATA_BACKUP.
Then the tasks are saved in the directory \TASKDATA.

198 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.3.3 Report
A report contains the summary of an task, i.e. duration, totals, operations,
etc. The report is in the form of a PDF file.
→ Your can filter the tasks before generating reports based on fields, custom-
ers or operations, or select individual tasks.
→ You can export the reports to a flash drive or send them to agrirouter.

Saving to a Export the reports to a flash drive as follows:

flash drive
1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.

2. Open the burger menu.

3. Press the "Report" button.

→ The "Report" selection list is displayed.

4. Press on the "Flash drive" button.

→ The "Report" selection list is displayed.

Sending to Send reports to agrirouter as follows:

agrirouter

1. Open the burger menu.

2. Press the "Report" button.

→ The "Report" selection list is
displayed.

3. Press the "agrirouter" button.

→ The selection list "Send to:" is
displayed.

4. Select the destination points to

which the reports are to be sent
and confirm the entry.
→ The "Report" selection list is
displayed.

199 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

You can filter the tasks according to the following criteria:

Fields
All tasks that have been performed on the selected fields are recorded.

Customers
All tasks that are linked to the selected customers are recorded.

Operations
All tasks for which the selected operations have been carried out are rec-
orded.

Tasks
You select the tasks to be recorded.

5. In the "Report" selection list, select the filter category, e.g. "Fields".

6. Select one or more list items, e.g. one field, multiple or all fields.
→ The "Export" Action button is displayed.

7. Press the "Export" Action button.

→ The reports are exported.
→ When exporting to a flash drive, the reports are saved in the directory
\TASKDATA on the flash drive.
→ The CCI.Control home page is displayed.

200 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.3.4 Delete
You can delete fields, customers, operations, tasks, or application maps, or
empty the agrirouter inbox.

1. Open the burger menu.

2. Press the "Delete" button.

→ The "Delete" selection list is displayed.

Delete fields
3. Select "Fields".
→ Confirmation query 51041 is displayed.

4. Confirm the confirmation query.

→ All fields including the tasks are deleted.
→ The other master data is not deleted.

Delete
customers 3. Select "Customers".
→ Confirmation query 51043 is displayed.

4. Confirm the confirmation query.

→ All customers and all fields and tasks to which a customer is assigned
are deleted.
→ The other master data is not deleted.

Delete ope-
rations 3. Select "Operations".
→ Confirmation query 51044 is displayed.

4. Confirm the confirmation query.

→ All operations and all tasks to which an operation is assigned will be
deleted.
→ The other master data is not deleted.

201 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Delete tasks
3. Select "Tasks".
→ Confirmation query 51039 is displayed.

4. Confirm the confirmation query.

→ All tasks including the application maps, totals and location-based
data are deleted.
→ The master data, i.e. fields, products, farms, customers and opera-
tions are not deleted.

Delete ap-
plication 3. Select "Maps".
maps → Confirmation query 51040 is displayed.

4. Confirm the confirmation query.

→ All application maps that are not assigned to a task are deleted.
→ The master data, i.e. fields, products, farms, customers and opera-
tions are not deleted.

Empty inbox
3. Select "Inbox".
→ Confirmation query 51042 is displayed.

4. Confirm the confirmation query.

→ The agrirouter inbox is emptied.

CAUTION!

The deleted data cannot be restored.

202 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.4 Fields
Open the field list by pressing the "Fields" tile.
Fields have a field boundary, are linked to customers, farms, and crop types,
and contain a list of all tasks to be performed on the field.
→ The field is the central element of your task planning and documentation.

8.4.1 Field list

The field list has the following options for managing the fields:
• Add Field
• Rename field
• Copy field
• Delete field
• Export field as shape file
• Open the "Field" detailed view

Add Field Add a field to the field list as follows:

1. Press the "New field" button and confirm the entry.
→ The "Field" input dialogue is displayed.

2. Enter the field names and confirm the entry.

→ The "Field" detailed view ( Chapter 8.4.2) is displayed.
→ The field has no field boundary and no field size.
→ A task is created and added to the field.

Context
menu
In the field list, press and hold the button with the field.
→ The context menu is displayed.

The context menu ( Chapter 8.2.2) offers the following operating options:
Copy field
A copy of the field is added to the field list. The name of the copy has the
suffix "_#1".
The field size is copied to the new field. The other contents of the new field
– field boundary, customer, tasks, etc. - are empty.
Press the button "Copy".
→ The copy of the field is displayed in the "Task" detailed view.
→ You can edit the task or start it.

203 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Delete field
The field including the assigned tasks and their totals and location-based
data is deleted. The master data, i.e. product, crop type, customer, etc., is
not deleted.
Press the "Delete" button.
→ The field is deleted.

Export field
You can export a field to a flash drive, for example, to use it on another ter-
minal.
1. Connect a flash drive to the terminal.
2. Press the "Export" button.
→ The field is saved as a shape file on the flash drive in the directory
\SHAPE_EXPORT.

NOTE

The shape file only contains the field boundary.

No other field-related data is exported.

8.4.2 Field detailed view

Press the button with the field in the Field list.

→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed:

1: Search and Filter

2: Field name and field size
3: Field boundary
→ The field boundary is indicated as an
orange line
4: Customer and farm
5: Crop type and crop variety
6: Task list

204 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

You have the following operating options:

1: Open the search window ( Chap-

ter 8.2.1)
2: Change field name and field size
3: Change customer and farm
4: Change crop type and crop variety
5: Add task
6: Open "task" detailed view
7: Use the context menu to edit task
name, copy, delete, or export task

Field name Change field name and field size as follows:

and field
size 1. Press the button with the field name.
→ The "Field" input dialogue is displayed.

2. Enter the field names and confirm the entry.

→ The "Field Size" input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the field size and confirm the entry.

→ The changes are saved.
→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed.

 If you do not know the field size, enter 0.

Customer Change customer and farm as follows:

and farm
1. Press the button with the customer.
→ The "Customer" selection list is displayed.

2. Select the customer.

3. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The "Farm" selection list is displayed.

205 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

4. Select the farm.

5. Press the "Completed" Action button.

→ Customer and farm are assigned to the field.
→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

Customer and farm are optional information.

If you assign a customer to the fields, you can filter the field list based on
customers.
If you want to use the "Customers" tile, you must assign a customer to the
fields.
Assign customer and farm to the field, if you require this information to doc-
ument the tasks.

Crop type Crop type and crop variety are optional field information.
and crop va-
riety 1. Press the button with the crop type.
→ The "Crop type" selection list is displayed.

2. Select the crop type.

3. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The "Crop variety" selection list is displayed.

4. Select the crop variety.

5. Press the "Completed" Action button.

→ Crop type and crop variety are assigned to the field.
→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

Crop type and crop variety are optional information.

If you assign a crop type the fields, you can filter the field list based on the
crop types.
Assign crop type and crop variety to the field, if you require this information
to document the tasks.

206 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.5 Customers
Open the customer list by pressing the "Customer" tile.

The customer list is ideal if you want to quickly access the fields and tasks of
a particular customer:
1. Press the "Customers" tile.
→ The customer list is displayed.

2. Select a customer.
→ All of the customer’s fields are
displayed.

3. Select a field.
→ The "Field" detailed view is
displayed.
→ You can edit the field's proper-
ties ( Chapter 8.4.2).

If the customer does not exist, add it as follows:

2. Press the "New Customer" button and confirm the entry.
→ The "Surname" input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the surname and confirm the entry.

→ No fields are assigned to a new customer.
→ The empty field list is displayed.

4. Press the "New Field" button.

→ The "Field" input dialogue is displayed.

5. Enter the field names and confirm the entry.

→ The "Field" detailed view is displayed.
→ You can edit the field's properties ( Chapter 8.4.2).
→ A task is created and added to the field.

207 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Context The following operating options are available in the context menu ( Chap-
menu
ter 8.2.2) of the customer list:
• Edit customer
• Copy customer
• Delete customer

Press and hold the button for the customer.

→ The context menu is displayed.

NOTE

Deleted customers are removed from fields.

If you delete a customer, it is removed from all fields.
However, the fields are not deleted.

208 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.6 Operations
Open the operation list by pressing the "Operations" tile.
Use of the operation list is ideal if you want to quickly access the fields on
which a specific operation – e.g. nitrogen fertilisation – is to be carried out.

1. Press the "Operations" tile.

→ The operation list is displayed.

2. Select an operation.
→ All fields on which this opera-
tion is performed are dis-
played.

3. Select a field.
→ The "Field" detailed view is
displayed.
→ You can edit the field's proper-
ties ( Chapter 8.4.2).

NOTE

"Operation" filter is activated.

Only tasks with the selected operation are displayed in the field’s task list.

209 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

If the operation does not exist, add it.

In the same step, assign the operation to all fields on which you want to per-
form this operation:
2. Press the "New operation" button and confirm the entry.
→ The "Operation" input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the operation and confirm the entry.

→ The field list is displayed.

4. Select the fields on which the operation is to be performed.

5. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The product list is displayed.

6. Select the products to be applied by the operation.

7. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The driver list is displayed.

8. Select the driver who is to perform the operation.

9. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The entered data is displayed for checking.

10. Press the "Completed" Action button.

→ The field list is displayed.
→ The fields you selected in step 4 are displayed.

NOTE

Field, product and driver are optional.

It is not necessary to assign a field, product or driver to the new operation.
→ The new operation, has a name, but no assignments.
→ Subsequently, you can assign fields, products or a driver to the opera-
tion.

 An operation without a field and therefore without a task will not be

performed and therefore makes no sense.

210 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Change op- You can change an operation and assign additional fields, products and drivers
eration
to it:

1. Open the operation list and select the operation.

→ The fields on which this operation is performed are displayed.

2. Press the "Change operation" button.

→ The "Change" operating screen is displayed.

3. Press the "Fields" button.

→ The "Fields" selection list is displayed.

4. Select the fields on which the operation is to be performed, and confirm

the selection with "Back".
→ The "Change" operating screen is displayed.

5. Press the "Products" button.

→ The "Products" selection list is displayed.

6. Select the products with which the operation is to be performed, and

confirm the selection with "Back".
→ The "Change" operating screen is displayed.

7. Press the "Driver" button.

→ The "Driver" selection list is displayed.

8. Select the driver who is to perform the operation, and confirm the selec-
tion with "Back".
→ The "Change" operating screen is displayed.

9. Press the "Completed" Action button.

→ New tasks are created and added to the fields you selected in step 4.
→ The products from step 6 and the driver from step 8 are linked to the
new tasks.
→ The field list displays all fields to which the operation is assigned.

211 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

NOTE

The selected products and drivers will only be applied to the new
tasks.
In general, the operation is usually already linked to fields and thus tasks
before a change.
→ The changes do not affect already existing links, i.e., such tasks retain
their original products and drivers.

NOTE

Assigned fields cannot be removed.

You can add additional fields when changing the operation as described
above.
It is not possible to remove fields once they have been assigned.

Context The following operating options are available in the context menu ( Chap-
menu
ter 8.2.2) of the operation list:
• Edit operation
• Copy operation
• Delete operation

Press and hold the operation’s button.

→ The context menu is displayed.

NOTE

Deleted operations are removed from tasks.

If you delete an operation, it is removed from all tasks.
However, the tasks themselves are not deleted.

212 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7 Active task

To pause and edit the current task or to view the task details, open the "Task"
detailed view.

8.7.1 "Task" detailed view

Press the "Active task" tile.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.
→ The task can be edited or started/paused:

1: Back to the task list

2: Select or add field ( Chap-
ter 8.7.3)
3: Import or edit application map
4: Assign implement
5: Add or edit product
6: CCI.Assist
7: Task start and duration
8: Display of the totals
9: Select or add operation
10: Select or add driver
11: Start or pause task
12: Add comment

213 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.2 Starting a task

After starting the task, the totals and the location-based data are recorded.
These values are added to the task. The implement manufacturer indicates
which totals and location-based data are made available.

Totals are for example:

• Worked area,
• Quantity spread,
• Time in the work position,
• Distance travelled in the work position.

Location-based data is for example:

• Work position,
• Actual value of the application rate,
• Pump speed,
• Spraying pressure,
• Container volume.

Start
Press the "Start" Action button.
→ Totals and location-based data are documented.
→ If the task has a field and an application map, these are displayed in
the map view.

Pause or end
You want to suspend processing of the task or want to finish the task:
Press the "Pause" action button.

Save
The AUTOLOG task cannot be paused.
You can save and reset the AUTOLOG task ( Chapter 8.7.14) by pressing
the "Save" Action button.
→ After saving, the totals are reset to zero and the location-based data is
deleted.
→ The AUTOLOG task starts again.

1. Press the "Save" Action button.

→ The "Task" input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter a name and confirm the entry.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

214 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.3 Add Field

If the task is not linked to a field or is linked to the incorrect field, select an-
other field:
1. In the "Task" detailed view, press
the button with the field.
→ The field list is displayed.

2. Select the field.

3. End the process with "Back".

→ The task is added to the field.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

Use the search tool to find the desired field in a long field list:
4. Press the "Search" button.
→ An input field is displayed.

5. Enter the search term and confirm your entry.

→ Only those fields are displayed whose name contains the search term.
→ The filter remains active until you delete the search term. ( Chap-
ter 8.2.1)

You want to the task to a field, but the field is not in the field list. Add a field
to the field list as follows:
2. Press the "New field" button and confirm the entry.
→ The "Field" input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the field names and confirm the entry.

→ The field list is displayed.

4. End the process with "Back".

→ The new field has no field boundary and no field size.
→ The task is added to the field.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

215 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

NOTE

The new field has no field boundary and a field size of 0.00 ha.
The documentation of the task data also functions without a field boundary.
The precise field size not normally known.
Do not change the preset value of 0.00.
Start the task and draw out a field boundary in CCI.Command( Chap-
ter 9.3.2).
→ The field size is automatically calculated.

NOTE

Field, field boundary and field size are optional.

The task can be started without a field. The totals and the location-based
data are documented.

To add a field with a field boundary and field size to the field list, you can:
• Create the new field in the map view and add the field to the field
list( Chapter 9.3.2)
• Create the field with the FMIS and import the field as an ISO-XML file
( Chapter 8.3.1)

216 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.4 Edit field

You can change the field name and field size.

1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the button with the field.
→ The field list is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button with

the field.
→ The context menu is dis-
played.

3. Press "Edit".
→ The "Field" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the field names and confirm the entry.

→ The "Field Size" input dialogue is displayed.

5. Enter the field size and confirm the entry.

→ The field list is displayed.

NOTE

The field boundary can also be changed.

You change the field boundary in CCI.Command:
1. Delete the old field boundary ( Chapter 9.3.3).
2. Record the new field boundary ( chapter 9.3.2).

217 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.5 Adding an application map

If the task does not have an application map, "No map" is displayed on the
button.
→ You can add an application map to the task in shape format.
→ The application map can be added from the flash drive, agrirouter inbox or
map storage.

1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the button "No map".

→ The selection window "Import application map" is displayed.

2. Select the tab with the storage location of the application map.
→ The selection list with the application maps in the selected storage lo-
cation is displayed.

3. Select the application map.

4. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.
→ The application map has been added to the task.

NOTE

A shape application map always comprises a number of files:

• .dbf,
• .shp,
• .shx and optional
• .prj.
→ If all the files of the shape application map are not on the flash drive,
CCI.Control cannot perform the import.

Copy all files of the shape application map onto the flash drive.

218 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

NOTE

The form and content of the shape application map must satisfy the
specifications.
Otherwise, CCI.Control cannot process the shape application map.

See the appendix Application maps.

8.7.6 Editing an application map

If the task is paused, you can make the following settings to the application
map:
• Adjust setpoint
→ The setpoint stored in the application
map can be adjusted up or down in
percent.
• Default rate
→ This absolute setpoint is used at lo-
cations at which the application map
does not provide a setpoint.
• Out of field rate
→ This absolute setpoint is used outside
the field boundaries.
• Rate when GPS fails
→ This absolute setpoint is used when
no GPS signal is available due to
shading.

1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the button of the application map.
→ The Settings list is displayed.

2. Press the button with the setting that you want to change.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the value and confirm the entry.

219 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.7 Delete application map

You can remove an application map from the task as follows:
1. Press and hold the button with
the application map.
→ The context menu is dis-
played.

2. Press "Delete".
→ The link between the applica-
tion map and the implement is
broken.
→ The application map is re-
moved from the task.

8.7.8 Assign implement

You can link each application map in the task with application implement.

1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the "No implement" button to the right of
the application map.
→ The connected implements that can process the set points of the appli-
cation map are displayed.

2. Select an implement and press "back" to end the process.

NOTE

Linking the implement to the application map is optional

You do not need to assign an implement to the application map.
→ If no implement is assigned, the setpoints for all implements are sent to
the ISOBUS in a readable format.
→ The implement decides whether it evaluates the setpoints.

220 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.9 CCI.Assist
If a task is running, CCI.Assist shows additional information about the tank or
loading space as well as about the field:

Top line: Information about the tank or

loading space
1: Remaining tank contents or free volume
in the loading space
2: Remaining area until tank empty or
loading space full
3: Time until tank empty or loading space
full
4: Distance until tank empty or cargo bay
full

Bottom line: Field data

5: Quantity and/or required loading space
required to process the remaining area
6: Remaining area

NOTE

You require a licence for CCI.Assist.

8.7.10 Add product

A product is applied to the field, e.g. fertiliser, pesticide or seed.
→ For complete documentation, add all products used with unit and quantity
to the task.

• You can add an existing product to the task

• You can create a new product and add it to the task

All imported products or products created on the terminal are managed in the
product list.

221 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Existing
product

1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the button "Products".

→ The "Products" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "New" Action button.

→ The product list is displayed.

3. Select the product.

4. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The "Unit" selection list is displayed.

5. Select the units.

6. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The "Quantity" input dialogue is displayed.

7. Enter the quantity and confirm the entry.

→ The "Quantity" operating screen is displayed.

8. Press the "Completed" Action button.

→ The product has been assigned to the task.
→ The "Products" operating screen is displayed.

9. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

The product can be added to the task multiple times.

If the originally planned quantity is insufficient, add product again.

222 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

Add product

1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the button "Products".

→ The "Products" operating screen is displayed.

2. Press the "New" Action button.

→ The product list is displayed.

3. Press the "New Product" button.

→ The "Product Name" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the product name and confirm the entry.

→ The product list is displayed.
→ The new product is selected.

5. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The "Unit" selection list is displayed.

6. Select the units.

7. Press the "Next" Action button.

→ The "Quantity" input dialogue is displayed.

8. Enter the quantity and confirm the entry.

→ The "Quantity" operating screen is displayed.

223 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

9. Press the "Completed" Action button.

→ The product has been assigned to the task.
→ The "Products" operating screen is displayed.

10. End the process with "Back".

→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

Delete the product from the task

Use the context menu to delete a product from the task:
1. In the "Task" detailed view, press the button "Products".
2. Press and hold the button with the product.
→ The context menu is displayed.
3. Select "Delete".
4. End the process with "Back".

224 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.11 Add operation

For complete documentation, add the operation carried out - e.g. tillage or
fertilisation - to the task.
• You can add an existing operation to the task
• You can create a new operation and add it to the task

All imported operations or operations created on the terminal are managed in

the operation list.

Existing
operation 1. In the "Task" detailed view, press
the "Operation" button
→ The operation list is displayed.
→ Use the search tool to find the
desired operation. ( Chap-
ter 4.3.5)

2. Select the operation.

3. End the process with "Back".

→ The operation is assigned to the task.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

Add opera-
tion 2. Press the "New operation" button and confirm the entry.
→ The "Operation" input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the name of the operation and confirm the entry.

→ The operation list is displayed.

4. End the process with "Back".

→ The operation is assigned to the task.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

NOTE

A task can only be assigned to one operation

225 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.12 Add driver

For complete documentation, add the driver of the tractor or self-propelled
implement to the task.
• You can add an existing driver to the task
• You can create a new driver and add them to the task

All imported drivers or drivers created on the terminal are managed in the
driver list.

Existing dri-
ver 1. In the "Task" detailed view, press
the "Driver" button
→ The driver list is displayed.
→ Use the search tool to find the
desired driver. ( Chap-
ter 4.3.5)

2. Select the driver.

3. End the process with "Back".

→ The driver is assigned to the task.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

Add driver
2. Press the "New driver" button and confirm the entry.
→ The "Surname" input dialogue is displayed.

3. Enter the surname and confirm the entry.

→ The "First name" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the first name and confirm the entry.

→ The driver list is displayed.

5. End the process with "Back".

→ The driver is assigned to the task.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

226 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.7.13 Comment
You can add a comment to the task that will be included in the report, such as
"rainy and cold".
The comment field has a maximum length of 32 characters.

1. Press the "Comment" button.

→ The "comment" input dialogue is displayed.

2. Enter the comment and confirm the entry.

→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.

8.7.14 AUTOLOG
AUTOLOG helps you keep task planning and documentation simple:
→ Use AUTOLOG if you do not want to create or import fields, customers or
operations.
AUTOLOG is a task that runs whenever no other task is present or active.
Therefore, you can simply move to the field without prior planning, record a
field boundary, load an application map, link a customer or create tracks, and
then perform the operation:
→ AUTOLOG records all counters and location-based data.
When you are finished, save the AUTOLOG task and give it a name, e.g. the
name of the field.
Then drive to the next field and repeat the process.

The following applies to the AUTOLOG task:

• It can be deleted
• It can be exported
• You can generate a report on each saved AUTOLOG task
• You can link a field, an application map, a customer, an operation with the
AUTOLOG task

227 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

8.8 Field Finder

Field Finder continuously compares the GPS coordinates of the fields in the
field list with the location of the tractor or the self-propelled implement.
A selection list is displayed when entering a known field. The list is overwrit-
ten with field name and field size (a) and contains the tasks for the field:

1: New task
→ Add a task to the field.
2: Task with application map
→ Task name (b), operation (c)
and application map icon (d)
are displayed.
3: Task without application map
→ Task name, operation and task
icon (e) are displayed.

You can select and start an existing task or create a new task and add it to
the field.

NOTE

Switch off Field Finder if the AUTOLOG task is being used.

If you are working with the "AUTOLOG" task, documentation takes place
continuously and across all fields.
→ The reference to the entry into a new field is not required.

Switch Field Finder off.

228 / 366
 8 Fields and tasks

1. Drive on to the field.

2. On the home page of CCI.Control open the burger menu and select
"Field Finder".
→ A selection list with all tasks belonging to the current position is dis-
played.

3. Select a task and confirm the entry.

→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.
→ The new task is automatically started.

Alternatively, you can create a new task and add it to the field:

3. Select "New task" and confirm the entry.

→ The "Task" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the task names and confirm the entry.

→ The task is created and added to the field.
→ The "Task" detailed view is displayed.
→ The new task is automatically started.

NOTE

Operate the Field Finder in automatic mode.

You can switch on the automatic Field Finder in the settings ( Chapter 8.1).
→ When you move to a field that is stored on the terminal, the selection list
with the tasks is displayed automatically. It is no longer necessary to
switch to the Burger menu to manually launch the Field Finder.

229 / 366
 9 Map view

9 Map view
This chapter introduces you to the following topics:
• Using view and operating elements of the map view ( Chapter 9.2)
• Creating headlands, tracks and markings,
• Correcting GPS drift ( Chapter 9.7.3),
• Operating Auto guidance.

Introduc- CCI.Command contains a detailed map view for use with Auto Guidance, Par-
tion
allel Tracking, Rate Control, Section Control or Tramline Control.

NOTE

Necessary licences
• You require the Section Control licence to be able to use automatic sec-
tion control.
• You require the Parallel Tracking licence to be able to use the parallel
driving aide.
• You require the Parallel Tracking licence to be able to use Auto Guidance.

Some self-propelled implements have an automatic steering system, compris-

ing the ECU-S1 steering computer and the Auto Guidance app on the termi-
nal.
→ Set up the steering computer in Auto Guidance.
→ You can switch the automatic steering system on or off in map view.

230 / 366
 9 Map view

WARNING

The automatic steering system takes control of steering of the vehi-

cle.
→ The steered parts of the vehicle (wheels, axles, pivoting points) may be-
have unpredictably and endanger people close to the vehicle.
Ensure there are no people or obstacles near the vehicle before activating
automatic steering.

The system does not replace the driver.

→ As driver, you are responsible for safe use of the automatic steering sys-
tem.
Remain in the driver’s seat while automatic steering is switched on.

The automatic steering system does not divert around obstacles.

Observe the route in front of you and take control of the steering if an ob-
stacle must be driven around.

The driving speed is not controlled by the automatic steering system.

As the driver, you are responsible for maintaining a safe driving speed.

Use of the automatic steering system on public roads is not permitted.

Take control of the steering before driving on public roads.

231 / 366
 9 Map view

9.1 Setting up for operation

Prior prepa-
ration
Enter the licence for Section Control and/or Parallel Tracking in the termi-
nal ( Chapter 4.3.3).

In app management switch CCI.Command "on" ( Chapter 4.2.2).

Switch on the ISOBUS function Task Controller in ISOBUS settings

( Chapter 4.2.3) and set a Task Controller number.

Set up the tractor, implement and GPS ( Chapter 6.2,  Chapter 6.4,
 Chapter 6.6).

Before using the automatic steering system for the first time with the Auto
Guidance app, set up the ECU-S1 steering computer as described in the
operating instructions of the steering computer.

1. Open the CCI.Command settings:

a: Automatic reverse gear detection

b: Set minimum GPS accuracy for
Section Control
c: Switch for Krone Big-M
d: Avoid missed areas or double
treatment by setting the overlap
e: Beds mode
f: Adjust the internal lightbar
g: Track capture
h: Steering response
i: Steering response in reverse gear

2. Adjust CCI.Command ( Chapter 9.1.1,  Chapter 9.1.2,  Chap-

ter 9.1.3).

3. Press the "Settings" button on the start screen.

→ Setting up is ended.
→ The "Settings" operating screen is closed.

232 / 366
 9 Map view

9.1.1 Setting up Section Control

You have the following setting options:
Reverse gear detection
1. Press the "Reverse gear detection" button.
→ The "Reverse gear detection" selection list is displayed.
2. Select the method for detecting reverse gear.
3. End the process with "Back".

NOTE

Without a direction of travel signal, automatic reverse gear detection

does not work.
Not all tractors or self-propelled implements send a direction of travel signal
over the ISOBUS:
If a GPS receiver is connected, select "GPS" in step 2.
If neither the position data of a GPS receiver nor the direction of travel
signal of the tractor or the self-propelled implement is available, select
"Off" in step 2.

Reverse gear detection

The terminal detects the change in driving direction
• Via the direction of travel signal which the tractor or self-propelled imple-
ment sends over the ISOBUS or
• Via the GPS data.
The navigation arrow in the map view changes its direction upon reverse gear detection.
The map does not rotate.

Reverse gear detection via GPS is less reliable than the tractor's direction of travel sig-
nal. If you have selected detection via GPS and the direction of travel displayed does
not correspond to the actual direction of travel, proceed as follows:
In the map, press on the vehicle position indicator that is displayed.
→ The vehicle position indicator changes direction and colour.

233 / 366
 9 Map view

Minimum GPS signal quality

The automatic mode of Section Control requires a GPS signal with DGPS ac-
curacy or better.
→ Automatic mode is automatically deactivated when the GPS accuracy is
insufficient.

1. Press the button "Minimum GPS accuracy".

→ The "Minimum GPS accuracy" operating screen is displayed.
2. Select the accuracy class.
3. End the process with "Back".

NOTE

Only change the pre-setting for "Minimum GPS accuracy" if DGPS is

not available.
In some regions, DGPS is permanently unavailable:
Set the "Minimum GPS accuracy" to "GPS".
→ Then Section Control automatic mode also works with GPS.

Overwrite DeviceClass
Only switch on the "Overwrite DeviceClass" option, if the terminal is being
operated on the Big-M.
Press the "Overwrite DeviceClass" button.
→ The switch setting changes to "On".

234 / 366
 9 Map view

9.1.2 Setting up Parallel Tracking

You have the following setting options:
Overlap
1. Press the "Overlap" button
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter the overlap as a positive or negative value in centimetres.
3. End the process with "Back".

Overlap
The overlap compensates for steering errors and position data inaccuracies.

1. Avoid missed areas.

Enter a positive overlap.
→ The distance between the guidance tracks reduces by the entered value.
→ The effective working width is reduced.
→ Missed areas are avoided.
→ Overlapping can occur.
2. Avoid overlaps.
Enter a negative overlap.
→ The distance between the guidance tracks increases by the entered value.
→ Overlapping is avoided.
→ Missed areas can occur.

Beds
In bed mode, you can jump tracks and thus U-turn in a single turning ma-
noeuvre in smaller working widths.
→ With setting "1" each guidance track is used.
→ Setting 2/3/4/5 means that every second/third/fourth/fifth guidance
track is highlighted in the portrayal. The remaining guidance tracks are
shown as dashes.

1. Press the "Beds" button.

→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter a value between 1 and 5.
3. End the process with "Back".

235 / 366
 9 Map view

Lightbar
The white segments of the lightbar indicate the deviation from the guidance
track.
Specify what deviation a segment of the lightbar represents.
1. Press the "Lightbar" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter a value between 10 and 100 cm.
3. End the process with "Back".

9.1.3 Setting up Auto guidance

NOTE

The automatic steering system is only available on self-propelled im-

plements.
→ Not all self-propelled implements are equipped with it.
→ The steering computer ECU-S1 is required for automatic steering using
Auto Guidance.

You have the following setting options:

Track capture
Set how quickly the vehicle steers in the direction of a recorded guidance
track.
1. Press the "Track capture" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter a value between 1 and 10.
3. End the process with "Back".

Track capture
The vehicle should take the shortest path to the recorded guidance track,
without steering sharply or suddenly in doing so.

The value to be set is heavily dependent on the vehicle type.

Determine the ideal value by trial and error.

236 / 366
 9 Map view

Steering response
Adjust how quickly the vehicle responds to the automatic steering com-
mands during forward travel.
1. Press the "Steering response" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter a value between 1 and 10.
3. End the process with "Back".

Steering response
The vehicle should remain on the guidance track without steering too sharply
or too suddenly.

The value to be set is heavily dependent on the vehicle type.

Determine the ideal value by trial and error.

1: The set value is too high.

→ The system responds too
quickly.
→ The wheels are very skittish.

2: The set value is ideal.

3: The set value is too low.

→ The system responds too
slowly.
→ The vehicle deviates too far
from the guidance track.

Steering response in reverse gear

Adjust how quickly the vehicle responds to the automatic steering com-
mands during travel in reverse gear.
1. Press the "Steering response in reverse gear" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
2. Enter a value between 1 and 10.
3. End the process with "Back".

237 / 366
 9 Map view

9.2 Map elements

The map provides view and control elements.

9.2.1 View and operating elements

1: Centre map
2: Compass, toggle between 2D view, 3D view and
overview
3: Lightbar
4: Move track
5: Guidance tracks
6: Reference track
7: Vehicle position and direction of travel
8: Burger menu

View elements not visible in the example:

• Reference point
• Markings

Zoom
Pinch out
→ Zoom in on the map.

Pinch in
→ Zoom out on the map.

Undoing de-
lete actions
The following map view elements can be deleted:
• Field boundary
• Headland
• Tracks
• Markings
• Worked area
• Field

The deletion can be undone.

If you have pressed "Delete", a message window is displayed for approxi-
mately 3 seconds. The "Undo" button is located on the right edge.
Press the "Undo" button.
→ The previous condition is restored.

238 / 366
 9 Map view

Centre map
The button "Centre map" is only displayed if you have moved the map by
swiping.
→ The vehicle position is no longer centred.
→ Tracking is off, i.e. the map does not move with the vehicle.

Press the "Centre map" button.

→ The map is centred.
→ The "Centre map" button is hidden.

Compass
2D map view
The map is displayed two-dimensionally.
The 2D map is displayed using a self-centred coordinate system:
→ The vehicle position is centred and points upwards.
→ The map rotates.

Press the "2D Compass" button.

→ The map is displayed in 3D.

3D map view
The map is displayed three-dimensionally.
The 3D map is displayed using a self-centred coordinate system:
→ The vehicle position is centred and points forwards.
→ The map rotates.

Press the "3D Compass" button.

→ The map is displayed in overview.

Overview
The entire field is displayed in overview. The overview is displayed using the
geographical coordinate system:
→ The map is oriented to the North.
→ North is upwards.
→ The vehicle indication moves.

Press the "Compass" button.

→ The map is displayed in 2D.

239 / 366
 9 Map view

Lightbar
To open, drag downwards
→ The deviation from the track is displayed as a numerical value and in the
segment display.

To close, push upwards

→ The deviation from the track is also shown as a numerical value.

Reference Multiple reference tracks can be added to one task.

track
→ The names of the reference tracks are displayed in the map.
→ The name of the active track is highlighted in red.
→ The guidance tracks of the activated reference track are displayed.

Select track  Chapter 9.5.1

Press the track name.

→ The reference track is selected.
→ The guidance tracks are calculated and displayed.

Renaming a  Chapter 9.5.5

track
1. Press and hold the track name.
→ The "Track name" input dialogue is displayed.

2. Enter the track name and confirm the entry.

Move track
 Chapter 9.5.4
1. Fold the lightbar out.
→ The "Move" button is displayed.
→ The button is greyed out and disabled.
2. Press the "Move" button.
→ The button is enabled.
3. Press the "Move" button again.
→ The track is moved to the actual position of the tractor.

240 / 366
 9 Map view

Vehicle po-
sition
Vehicle position
Position of the tractor or self-propelled implement:
→ The vehicle is stationary or moving forward.
→ The tip of the arrow points in the direction of travel.
→ The vehicle position is calculated based on the position of the GPS aerial.
→ The implement depiction takes into consideration the mounting type.
→ The sections and their geometries are also displayed.

Vehicle position in reverse

Position of the tractor or self-propelled implement. The vehicle travels back-
wards.

Changing
the direc-
Manually changing the direction of travel
tion of tra- If reverse gear detection with GPS is switched on, you can manually change
vel the direction of travel. For example, this may be necessary if reverse gear
is not automatically detected.
To change the direction of travel in map view, press the arrow.
→ The arrow changes its colour to red.
→ The map rotates to the correct position.

241 / 366
 9 Map view

You have the following operating options in the burger menu:

Burger
menu
Field boundary ( Chapter 9.3)
You have the following operating options:
• Calculate field boundary
• Record field boundary
• Delete field boundary

Headland ( Chapter 9.4)

You have the following operating options:
• Lock headland
• Calculate circumferential headland
• Record individual headland
• Assemble the headland based on the field boundary sections
• Delete headland

Tracks ( Chapter 9.5)

You have the following operating options:
• Select reference track
• Hide reference track
• Add reference track
• Move reference track
• Renaming a reference track
• Change reference track
• Delete reference track

Marking ( Chapter 9.6)

You have the following operating options:
• Add marking
• Adding a marking line
• Move marking
• Changing the type
• Insert comment
• Delete marking

Field ( Chapter 9.7)

You have the following operating options:
• Delete worked area
• Save field
• Add reference point
• Calibrate reference point
• Delete field

242 / 366
 9 Map view

Reference
point
Reference point
The reference point created by you or imported with the task.

Markings The following marking types are available:

Obstacle

Field entrance

Unloading location

Comment

Move mar-  Chapter 9.6.3

king
1. Press and hold the marking and keep the marking pressed.
→ Map changes to editing mode.

2. Use your finger to move the markings to the new location and confirm your
entry.

NOTE

A marking line can also be moved

Move one or both markings to change the position of the marking line.

Change  Chapter 9.6.4

marking
type 1. Press and hold the marking and keep the marking pressed.
→ Map changes to editing mode.

2. Select the new marking type in the selection bar.

→ The marking type has been changed.

3. Confirm the entry.

243 / 366
 9 Map view

9: Section Control mode

→ Green bar: Automatic mode
→ White bar: manual mode
10: Boom
11: If a field boundary is present:
→ Remaining area
11: If no field boundary is present:
→ Worked area
12: Field size
13: Number and activity of sections
→ Blue: on
→ Black: off
→ Red: manual override
14: Working width
15: Actual setpoint
16: Implement
17: Setpoints in the application map

View elements not visible in the example:

• Area preview, remaining area until tank empty or
loading space full
• Position preview, position with tank empty or full
cargo bay
• Status of the automatic steering

244 / 366
 9 Map view

Section
Control
Section Control is in automatic mode
mode → The sections of the ISOBUS implement are switched automatically.

Press the "Automatic section switching" button.

→ Section Control switches to manual mode.

Section Control is in manual mode

→ You switch the sections manually, e.g. during boundary spreading with
the fertilizer implement.

Press the "Manual section switching" button.

→ Section Control switches to automatic mode.

Manual The button is only displayed in the following cases:

marking
• If an ISOBUS implement is connected to the terminal
• If an ISOBUS implement is connected to the terminal, but does not support
Section Control
• You do not have a licence for Section Control

Marking of the worked area is on

The worked area is marked.
To switch off marking of the worked area, press the "Mark area" button.
→ The area is not marked.

Marking of the worked area is off

The worked area is not marked.
To switch on marking of the worked area, press the "Do not mark area"
button.
→ The area is marked according to the working width of the implement.

245 / 366
 9 Map view

Select boom An implement may have up to 4 booms. The selected boom is visually high-
lighted.
→ The worked area of the selected boom is displayed.

Press the "Boom" button.

→ The next boom is selected and visually highlighted.
→ The worked area of the selected boom is displayed.

Show appli- A task can contain several application maps.

cation map
→ Only one application map can be displayed in the map view.

Press the "Show application maps" button.

→ In doing so, you switch between the application maps of the task or hide
the setpoints display.

246 / 366
 9 Map view

Actual val- Instead of the worked area, a map can be displayed on the basis of imple-
ues
ment data, e.g.
• The application rate
• The harvest quantity
• The harvest quality
• The work quality

You define the upper and lower limits of the display values and the number of
intermediate steps:

1. Push the section display up.

2. Press the "worked area" button.

→ The "Implement data" selection list is displayed.
→ The number and content of the list elements depend on the con-
nected implement.

3. Select a list element and press "back" to confirm the selection.

4. Press the "Maximum" button.

→ The "Maximum" input dialogue is displayed.

5. Enter the maximum and confirm the entry.

6. Press the "Minimum" button.

→ The "Minimum" input dialogue is displayed.

7. Enter the minimum and confirm the entry.

8. Press the "Steps" button.

→ The "Steps" input dialogue is displayed.

9. Enter the number of intermediate steps between minimum and maxi-

mum and confirm the entry.
→ Each intermediate step is automatically assigned a colour.

10. Pull the section display down.

→ Instead of the worked area, the actual values are displayed in the
map.

247 / 366
 9 Map view

Position CCI.assist supports work planning on the field during application and harvest-
preview,
ing.
area pre-
view
Open the CCI.Control settings and switch on CCI.Assist ( Chapter 8.1).

a: Position preview
→ At this position, the tank will be
empty or the loading space full
b: Area preview
→ This area can still be worked until the
tank is empty or the loading space is
full
c: Vehicle position

NOTE

The preview is only available if you have a licence for CCI.Assist.

Display all If "Display all fields" is switched on ( Chapter 8.1), all fields within a radius
fields
of 10 km of the current position are displayed:
→ The fields that satisfy the filter that is active in CCI.Control are displayed
with a red field boundary and area ( Chapter 8.2.1).
→ All other fields are displayed with a white hatched field boundary.

1. Press on a field in the map view.

→ A selection list is displayed with
all the tasks belonging to the
field.
2. Select a task and confirm the en-
try.
→ The task is automatically
started.

248 / 366
 9 Map view

Auto Guid- The button is displayed, if the ECU-S1 steering computer is installed on the
ance
vehicle and you have a licence for Parallel Tracking.

Automatic steering is off

→ You must steer the vehicle.
Press the "Automatic steering is off" button.
→ Automatic steering is switched on.
→ The vehicle is steered automatically.

The closest guidance track is headed towards

→ Automatic steering is on.
→ The vehicle is steered by the automatic steering in the direction of the
closest guidance track.

Automatic steering is on
→ The automatic steering steers the vehicle along the guidance track.

Move the steering wheel or press the "Automatic steering is on" button.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.
→ You are steering the vehicle.

Automatic steering is disabled

Automatic steering cannot be switched on due to an error.
→ The driver must steer the vehicle.

1. Press the "Automatic steering is disabled" button.

→ Status information is displayed (see below).
→ Errors are marked with a red cross.
→ You can find explanations of the error messages on page 250.
2. Rectify the error.
3. Switch automatic steering on.

249 / 366
 9 Map view

Status information Cause/remedy

Steering data There is no reference track or a reference track has not been selected.
/
Option a: There is no reference track:
 Create a reference track ( Chapter 9.5.3).

Option b: None of the available reference tracks have been selected:

 Select a reference track ( Chapter 9.5.1).

Working width The working width of the implement has not been set. The guidance tracks can-
not be calculated.
/
 Set the implement’s working width ( Chapter 6.4. 1).

GPS accuracy The GPS accuracy is insufficient.

/
1. Check the symbol in the status bar ( Chapter 3.3).
→ Three green dots must be displayed.
→ Using EGNOS or WAAS correction, "DGPS" is indicated by 3 green dots,
next to RTK correction "RTK fix" or "RTK float".
2. Wait until the signal is available with the required accuracy.
3. Switch automatic steering on.

Attitude There is a problem with the GPS data.

/
1. Wait until the GPS signal is available with the required accuracy.
2. Switch automatic steering on.

Vehicle calibration Initial set-up of the ECU-S1 steering computer has not been performed.
/
 Perform the initial set-up using the Auto Guidance app ( Chapter 9.1.3).

Valid data There is no reference track or a reference track has not been selected.
/
Option a: There is no reference track:
 Add a reference track ( Chapter 9.5. 3).

Option b: None of the available reference tracks have been selected:

 Select a reference track ( Chapter 9.5.1).

System ready The ECU-S1 steering computer is not yet ready for use.
/
 Wait a few minutes.

Driver present The seat switch reports that the driver's seat is empty.
/
 Sit in the driver's seat.

Licence key The Auto Guidance licence has not been input.
/
 Enter the licence for the ECU-S1 steering computer in Auto Guidance.
→ Contact your dealer or service partner to purchase a licence.

250 / 366
 9 Map view

Condition Cause/remedy

ISOBUS connection The ECU-S1 steering computer is not connected to the ISOBUS.
/
 Connect the steering computer to the ISOBUS.

ISOBUS steering sys- The vehicle's steering is not ready.

tem /
 Refer to the vehicle's operating instructions to see how the ISOBUS steering
is switched on.

Seat switch The seat switch is not present, is defective or is not detected.
/
 Contact your dealer or service partner.

Road switch The road switch is "on".

→ Automatic steering is not permitted on the road.
/
 If the vehicle is in a field, switch the road switch to "off".

ISOBUS/CAN bridge The ECU-S1 steering computer is not connected to the ISOBUS.
/
 Connect the steering computer to the ISOBUS.

CAUTION

The driver is always responsible for the vehicle's route, including

when using automatic steering.
If an error occurs, automatic steering is switched off without a confirmation
query.
→ The driver must take over steering of the vehicle.
Remain in the driver's seat even when automatic steering is activated and
observe the route ahead and the terminal.

251 / 366
 9 Map view

9.2.2 Editing mode

When a function is called, e.g. "Record field boundary", the map switches to
editing mode:
→ Depending on the function called, one or more action buttons are dis-
played.

Performing several work steps simultaneously

Field boundary, headlands, and reference track can be recorded simultane-
ously. The combination of work steps is useful, for example, for the first
journey around the field perimeter.

The action buttons associated with a recording are la-

belled with a unique label.
→ In this way, recordings can be individually started,
paused and stopped.

The "Cancel" action button aborts all current record-

ings.
→ Previously completed steps, such as a recorded
track, are not undone.

252 / 366
 9 Map view

9.3 Field boundary

9.3.1 Calculate
Use the "Calculate boundary" function, if you are working the outer area dur-
ing the first journey around the field perimeter.
→ The terminal calculates the field boundary based on the outer edge of the
worked area.
1. Drive around the field and in doing so, mark the worked area.
→ The worked area is indicated as a closed shape.
2. Press the "Field boundary" button in the burger menu.
→ The "Field boundary" menu is displayed.
3. Press the "Calculate" button.
→ The field boundary is calculated.
→ The field boundary is indicated in orange.
→ Small gaps are automatically closed.

9.3.2 Record
Use the function "Record boundary" in the following cases:
• If you do not want to work the field during the first travel around its perim-
eter
• You want to create an inner field boundary
→ The terminal records the field boundary based on the path driven by you.
1. Press the "Field boundary" button in the burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Field boundary" menu is displayed.

2. Press the "Record" button.

→ The input dialogue "Record field boundary" is displayed:

a: Position of the marker

→ Left or right outer edge of the
implement
b: Outer or inner field boundary

3. Select the position of the marker.

253 / 366
 9 Map view

4. Select the outer or inner field boundary and confirm the entry.
→ Map changes to editing mode.

5. Drive to the start point of the recording.

6. Press the "Record" button and

drive around the field.
→ The field boundary is rec-
orded.

7. End recording with "Stop".

→ The field boundary is saved.
→ Small gaps are automatically
closed.

NOTE

Pause, Start and Cancel

You can interrupt recording with "Pause" and continue it with "Start".
→ A straight line is drawn between the Pause and Record points.

You can end recording of the field boundary with "Cancel".

→ The field boundary recorded up until then is deleted.

254 / 366
 9 Map view

NOTE

A field must have an outer field boundary.

An inner field boundary can only be recorded in a field with an outer field
boundary.
Several inner field boundaries can be recorded.

NOTE

A field boundary can only be recorded if a GPS signal with DGPS ac-
curacy or better is available.
The minimum GPS accuracy is set ex works to DGPS, as otherwise it will only
be possible to perform location-based functions inaccurately.

In some regions, DGPS is permanently unavailable:

Set the "Minimum GPS accuracy" to "GPS" ( Chapter 9.1.1).
→ The field boundary can be recorded with a GPS signal of GPS accuracy.

9.3.3 Delete

1. Press the "Field boundary" button in the burger menu.

→ The "Field boundary" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Delete" button.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
3. Select the field boundary.
4. Press the "Delete" action button.
→ The field boundary is deleted.
→ The deletion can be undone.

255 / 366
 9 Map view

9.4 Headland

9.4.1 Lock
You can lock an existing headland or release it for working.
If the switch is in the "on" position, the headland cannot be worked:
→ The headland is displayed with orange hatching.
→ Sections are automatically switched off in the headland.
→ The inner field can be worked.

If the switch is in the "off" position, the headland is released for working:
→ The headland is still present, but is not displayed.
→ Headland and inner field can be worked.

Switch "Locked" "on".

→ Sections are switched off in the headland.

9.4.2 Circumferential headland

The circumferential headland is calculated based on an existing field bound-
ary.

Prior prepa-
ration
Create a field boundary ( Chapter 9.3).

1. Press the "Headland" button in the burger menu.

→ The "Headland" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Circumferential" button.
→ An input dialogue is displayed.
3. Enter the width of the headland and confirm the entry.
→ The headland is displayed.
→ The headland is locked.

256 / 366
 9 Map view

9.4.3 Record
You can record an individual headland, e.g. with a headland at each of the
field ends.
A field boundary is not necessary.

1. Press the "Headland" button in the burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Headland" menu is displayed.

2. Press the "Record" button.

→ The input dialogue "Individual headland" is displayed:

a: Width of the headland

b: Position of the marker
→ Left or right outer edge of the
implement, implement middle
or outer edge of the implement
c: Headland as straight line
→ The headland is the straight
line between the start and end
points of the recording
d: Headland follows driving track
→ The headland has the shape of
the path driven between the
start and end of the recording

3. Press the "Width" input field and enter the width of the headland.

4. Select the position of the marker.

5. Select the form of the headland and confirm the entry.

→ Map changes to editing mode.

257 / 366
 9 Map view

6. Drive to the start point of the recording.

7. Press the "Record" button and

drive to the end point of the
headland.
→ The headland is recorded.

8. End recording with "Stop".

→ The headland is saved.

9. To record a headland comprising one or more sections (as shown in the

figure), repeat step 1 to 8 for each section.

Headland marker
The width of the headland marker is pre-set as the working width of the im-
plement.

The width of the headland and thus the headland marker, can be manually changed. If
the width of the marker is bigger than the working width, the position of the headland
marker can be changed. The setting can be changed between central (default) and right
or left outside of the implement.
Selecting right or left outside edge as the setting makes it possible for example to drive
with the implement directly along the field boundary and to mark the entire set width of
the headland within the field boundary.

258 / 366
 9 Map view

NOTE

A headland can only be recorded if a GPS signal with DGPS accuracy

or better is available.
The minimum GPS accuracy is set ex works to DGPS, as otherwise it will only
be possible to perform location-based functions inaccurately.

In some regions, DGPS is permanently unavailable:

Set the "Minimum GPS accuracy" to "GPS" ( Chapter 9.1.1).
→ The headland can be recorded with a GPS signal of GPS accuracy.

9.4.4 Select
The field boundary is automatically sub-divided into sections. You can assign
each section a headland of different width.
→ Use the function if the field boundary has been recorded with RTK GPS ac-
curacy.

Prior prepa-
ration
Create a field boundary ( Chapter 9.3).

1. Press the "Headland" button in the burger menu.

→ The "Headland" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Select" button.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
3. Select the sections.
4. Press the text field with the headland width.
→ The "Headland Width" input dialogue is displayed.
5. Enter the width of the headland and confirm the entry.
6. Confirm the entry with the "OK" action button.
→ The headland has been saved and is displayed.

259 / 366
 9 Map view

NOTE

The "Select" function is only available if a field boundary is present.

9.4.5 Delete

1. Press the "Headland" button in the burger menu.

→ The "Headland" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Delete" button.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
3. Select the headland.
4. Press the "Delete" action button.
→ The headland is deleted.
→ The deletion can be undone.

260 / 366
 9 Map view

9.5 Tracks

9.5.1 Select
If you have created multiple reference tracks, you can select which ones are
to be used in map view.

1. Press the compass until the map

is displayed as an overview.
→ All reference tracks are dis-
played.

2. Press on the track name.

→ The reference track is selected.
→ The guidance tracks are calculated and displayed.

9.5.2 Hide
You can hide the reference track and guidance tracks when they are not in
use.
1. Press the compass until the map is displayed as an overview.
→ All reference tracks are displayed.

2. Press on the track name of the active reference track.

→ The flag with the track name goes grey.
→ The reference track and the guidance tracks are hidden.

261 / 366
 9 Map view

9.5.3 Create
Create a reference track.
→ The guidance tracks are automatically calculated with a distance equal to
the working width of the implement.
1. Press the "Tracks" button in the burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Tracks" menu is displayed.

2. Press the "New" button.

→ The input dialogue "New tracks" is displayed:

a: Curve
→ The track has the shape of the
path driven between the start
and end of the recording.
b: Circle
→ The distance travelled between
the start and end of the record-
ing is a section of a circle. The
track is the entire circle.
c: Peripheral
→ The track is created along the
field boundary. The number of
guidance tracks can be speci-
fied.
d: Manual entry
→ You enter the geo-coordinates
of points A and B in decimal de-
grees. The track is the straight
line between the two points.
e: A+
→ You enter an angle. The track
passes through the position of
the tractor and is created at the
entered angle in degrees from
North.
f: Straight track

The next steps are dependent on the form selected.

262 / 366
 9 Map view

NOTE

You can record multiple reference tracks for a field.

Only the guidance tracks of a reference track are displayed.
In map view, select the reference track whose guidance tracks you want
to display.

NOTE

A reference track can only be recorded if a GPS signal with DGPS ac-
curacy or better is available.
The minimum GPS accuracy is set ex works to DGPS, as otherwise it will only
be possible to perform location-based functions inaccurately.

In some regions, DGPS is permanently unavailable:

Set the "Minimum GPS accuracy" to "GPS" ( Chapter 9.1.1).
→ The reference track can be recorded with a GPS signal of GPS accu-
racy.

263 / 366
 9 Map view

Straight To create a track in the form of a straight line, circle or curve, record the path
line, circle
travelled:
and curve

3. Select the form of the track and confirm the entry.

→ Map changes to editing mode.

4. Drive to the start point of the recording.

5. Press the "Record" button and

drive to the end point of the
track.
→ Point A is drawn in.
→ The track is recorded.

6. End recording with "Stop".

→ Point B is drawn in.
→ The track is saved.
→ The track is automatically
used for Parallel Tracking.

Peripheral
3. Select "Circumferential" and confirm the entry.
→ The input dialogue "Number of tracks" is displayed.

4. Enter the number of guidance tracks and confirm the entry.

→ The reference track and the calculated guidance tracks are displayed.
→ The reference track is automatically used for Parallel Tracking.

NOTE

The circumferential track can only be added, if a field boundary is

present.

264 / 366
 9 Map view

Manual You enter the geo-coordinates of two points that are on the reference track.

3. Select "Manual" and confirm the entry.

→ The "Enter point A" input dialogue is displayed.

4. Enter the geo-coordinates of point A as a decimal degree and confirm

the entry.
→ The "Enter point B" input dialogue is displayed.

5. Enter the geo-coordinates of point B as a decimal degree and confirm

the entry.
→ The reference track and the calculated guidance tracks are displayed.
→ The reference track is automatically used for Parallel Tracking.

A+
3. Select "A+" and confirm the entry.
→ Map changes to editing mode.

4. Drive to the start point of the recording.

5. Press the "Record" button.

→ The input dialogue "Enter A+ angle" is displayed.

6. Enter the angle in degrees from North and confirm the entry.
→ The reference track passes through the position of the tractor and is
created at the entered angle in degrees from North.

265 / 366
 9 Map view

9.5.4 Move
Move the track to correct the GPS drift.
Also move the track, if when changing the implement, the working width also
changes, if for example a field sprayer with 24 m working width follows a
slurry tank with 12 m working width.

1. In map view, open the light bar.

→ The "Move" button is dis-
played.
→ The button is greyed out and
disabled.
2. Press the "Move" button.
→ The button is enabled.
3. Press the "Move" button again.
→ The track is moved to the ac-
tual position of the tractor.

Alternatively you can move the track manually via the burger menu or auto-
matically:
→ For manual moving, enter the size and direction of the movement.
→ With automatic moving, the track is moved to the actual position of the
tractor.

266 / 366
 9 Map view

Manually move tracks

1. Press the "Tracks" button in the
burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Tracks" burger menu is
displayed.
2. Press the "Move" button.
→ The input dialogue "Move
tracks" is displayed.
3. Press the "Movement size" input
field and enter the movement.
4. Select the direction of the move-
ment.
5. Confirm the entry.
→ The track is moved.
→ The map view is displayed.

Automatically move tracks

1. Drive to the point to which the
track is to be moved to.
2. Press the "Tracks" button in the
burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Tracks" burger menu is
displayed.
3. Press the "Move" button.
→ The input dialogue "Move
tracks" is displayed.
4. Select automatic movement.
5. Confirm the entry.
→ The track is moved to the ac-
tual position of the tractor.
→ The map view is displayed.

267 / 366
 9 Map view

9.5.5 Rename
If you crate a new track, it is automatically named, e.g. "AB 1", "A+ 1",
"Curve 1" or "Circle 1".
You can rename the track in the map view:

1. Press the compass until the map

is displayed as an overview.
→ The reference tracks are dis-
played.
2. Press and hold on the track
name.
→ The "Track name" input dia-
logue is displayed.
→ 3. Enter the track name
and confirm the entry.

9.5.6 Change
The angle can be changed for A+ tracks.
1. Press the compass until the map is displayed as an overview.
→ The reference tracks are displayed.
2. Press on the angle specification below the track name.
→ The input dialogue "Enter A+ angle" is displayed.
3. Enter the angle and confirm the entry.

268 / 366
 9 Map view

9.5.7 Delete

1. Press the "Tracks" button in the burger menu.

→ The "Tracks" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Delete" button.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
3. Select the track.
4. Press the "Delete" action button.
→ The track is deleted.
→ The deletion can be undone.

9.6 Markings
Points of interest (POI) in the field can be tagged with a marking and saved in
the task.
The following marking types can be selected:
• Field entrance
• Obstacles
• Unloading locations
• Comments

269 / 366
 9 Map view

9.6.1 Add

1. Press the "Marking" button in the burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Marking" menu is displayed.

2. Press the "New" button.

→ Map changes to editing mode.
→ A new marking of "Unloading location" type is added at the vehicle
position.

The marking type can be changed and the marking can be moved:

3. Select the desired marking type

in the selection bar.
→ The marking type has been
changed.

4. Press the marking and move it.

5. Confirm the entry.

→ The marking has been saved.

NOTE

Multiple markings can be added to one field.

270 / 366
 9 Map view

9.6.2 Adding a marking line

The marking line is a signal to the implement, e.g. to trigger a certain imple-
ment function.
→ The terminal signals each crossing of the marking line to the implement.

1. Press the "Marking" button in the burger menu of the map view.
→ The "Marking" menu is displayed.

2. Press the "New line" button.

→ Map changes to editing mode.
→ A marking line is added at the
vehicle position at a 90° angle
to the direction of travel.
→ Two markings are added to
the marking line with a sepa-
ration equal to the working
width.

NOTE

Multiple marking lines can be added to one field.

NOTE

You need the manufacturer’s instruction manual.

Read the manufacturer's instruction manual to determine if the implement
supports this function.

271 / 366
 9 Map view

9.6.3 Move
You change the position of markings and marking lines in map view:
1. Press and hold the marking and
keep the marking pressed.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
→ A grey circle is displayed be-
low the marking.

2. Move the marking to the new position.

3. Confirm the entry.

→ The new position of the marking has been saved.

Carry out the following to change the position of a marking line:

1. Press and hold one of the markings belonging to the line and keep the
marking pressed.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
→ A grey circle is displayed below both line markings.

2. Move one or both of the markings to the new position.

→ The orientation and position of the line change.

3. Confirm the entry.

→ The new position of the marking line has been saved.

272 / 366
 9 Map view

9.6.4 Changing the type

Change the marking type in map view:

1. Press and hold the marking and

keep the marking pressed.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
→ The selection bar with the
marking types is displayed.

2. Select the marking type.

3. Confirm the entry.

→ The new marking type has been saved.

273 / 366
 9 Map view

9.6.5 Enter comment

Use a "Comment" type marking if the other marking types are not suitable for
tagging the position.
→ You can assign a tag of your own to a "Comment" type marking.

1. Press and hold the text field be-

low a "Comment" type marking.
→ The input dialogue "Enter
comment" is displayed.

2. Enter the comment and confirm the entry.

→ The comment has been saved.

9.6.6 Delete

1. Press the "Marking" button in the Burger Menu.

→ The "Marking" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Delete" button.
→ Map changes to editing mode.
3. Select the marking.
4. Press the "Delete" action button.
→ The marking is deleted.
→ The deletion can be undone.

274 / 366
 9 Map view

9.7 Field

9.7.1 Delete worked area

To work the field again, delete the worked area:
1. Press the "Field" button in the burger menu.
→ The "Field" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Delete worked area" button.
→ The worked area is deleted.
→ The deletion can be undone.

9.7.2 Save
The field boundary, headland and tracks are saved in the field list and can be
reused:

1. Press the "Field" button in the burger menu.

→ The "Field" menu is displayed.
2. Press the button "Save".
→ The "Field Name" input dialogue is displayed.
3. Enter the field names and confirm the entry.
→ The field is saved in the field list.

NOTE

Saving the field is only possible in AUTOLOG.

If you have started a task, saving of the field is not necessary and not possi-
ble. The field, the tracks, the headland and the worked area are automati-
cally saved in the task.

275 / 366
 9 Map view

9.7.3 Correct GPS drift

GPS drift
Due to the Earth's rotation and the changing positions of the satellites in the
sky, the calculated position of a point moves. This is referred to as GPS-drift.

If you open saved position data after some time, then

you will often notice a drift relative to the actual posi-
tion.
Affected are:
• Field boundary
• Worked area
• Reference track
• Guidance tracks

The lower the accuracy of the correction data, the

stronger the GPS drift.

Correct the GPS drift:

1. Calibrate the Reference point ( Chapter 9.7.3).
→ Field boundary, tracks and obstacles are moved.
2. Move the reference track ( Chapter 9.5.4).

Add reference point

Select a prominent point, e.g. a gulley lid or a permanent marking in the
entry to the field. Mark this point.
→ To calibrate the reference point, you must be able to approach the exact
same position from exactly the same direction again.
1. Drive to the reference point and bring the tractor or self-propelled im-
plement to a stop.
2. Press the "Field" button in the burger menu.
→ The "Field" menu is displayed.
3. Press the "Set new reference point" button.

276 / 366
 9 Map view

Calibrate reference point

1. Approach the reference point with the tractor or the self-propelled im-
plement. In doing so, approach from the same compass point as when
adding the point.
2. Come to a stop precisely over the reference point.
3. Press the "Field" button in the burger menu.
→ The "Field" menu is displayed.
4. Press the "Calibrate reference point" button.

NOTE

You must be able to find the reference point again.

The recorded data is of no use if you can no longer find the position of the
reference point.
Note the exact position of the reference point.

NOTE

No reference point is needed with RTK.

If you use RTK, there is no GPS drift. You do not need to set the reference
point.

9.7.4 Delete
Delete the field, tracks, headland and worked area:
1. Press the "Field" button in the burger menu.
→ The "Field" menu is displayed.
2. Press the "Delete" button.
→ A message window is displayed.
3. Confirm the message.
→ The field, the tracks, the headland and the worked area are deleted.
→ The deletion can be undone.

277 / 366
 10 Miscellaneous

10 Miscellaneous

10.1 Testing apps

A licence is needed for the following functions:
App Function Licence name

agrirouter Task Control

Auto Guidance Auto Guidance

CCI.Assist, assistant for field work CCI.Assist

Parallel driving aide Parallel Tracking

Automatic Section Control Section Control

Task processing Task Control

Before purchasing a licence, you can test the apps without restriction, without
any obligation and free of charge for 50 hours:

278 / 366
 10 Miscellaneous

1. Open the "Licence data" screen.

→ The buttons for the start of
the trial period are displayed.

2. Press the button "50:00 h" for the app that you want to test.

3. Open the app in standard view ( Chapter 3.3, App menu section).
→ The message window "Remaining test hours" is displayed.

4. Only confirm the message if you

want to test the app.
→ You can use the app without
any restrictions.
→ The trial period starts to count
down.

279 / 366
 10 Miscellaneous

5. Check the remaining trial period

in the "Licence data" operating
screen.

NOTE

Only confirm the message window when starting to test the app.
The message window "Remaining test hours" is displayed when you start the
app. The remaining test hours only count down after you have confirmed the
message.
Do not confirm the message when restarting the terminal or when
launching the app, rather only when you actually want to test the app.
→ You have full control over when the trial period starts to count down.

10.2 Eject flash drive

NOTE

Do not simply pull out a connected flash drive.

It is possible that at an app will be reading or writing to the flash drive at
just this point in time. It will not be possible to end the data access cleanly.
Loss of data could occur.
Press on the "Unmount drive" button in the "Settings" operating screen.

280 / 366
 10 Miscellaneous

1. Press on the "Unmount drive"

button in Settings.
→ CCI.OS ends all accesses to
the flash drive.
→ The message "Flash drive re-
moved" appears in the status
bar.

2. Pull out the flash drive.

10.3 Closing Rescue System

The Rescue System can only be used by the service partner.
For easy differentiation from the CCI.OS, the Rescue System has a graphical
user interface of a different colour:

The service partner uses the Rescue System for the following purposes:
• Backing up and restoring
• Updating components of the operating system
• Error analysis

The Rescue System can only be intentionally started by the service partner.
After an internal error, it may occur that the terminal starts up in the Rescue
System.

Exit the Rescue System and restart CCI.OS.

281 / 366
 10 Miscellaneous

Exit the Rescue System as follows:

1. Press the "Language" button.

→ The "Language" selection list is displayed.

2. Select your language.

→ The checkbox at the right edge of the button is selected.

3. Press "Back".
→ The Rescue System is displayed.

4. Press the "Shutdown System" button.

→ The "Shutdown System" menu is displayed.

5. Press the "Reboot to CCI.OS" button.

→ The terminal restarts.
→ The safety instructions are displayed.

6. Drag the "Enter" button in the indicated direction.

→ The arrow changes its shape to a check mark.
→ The start screen of CCI.OS is displayed.

NOTE

CCI.OS will no longer start.

If the CCI.OS terminal can no longer start, a severe error has occurred.
→ You will not be able to rectify the error yourself.

Contact your service partner.

282 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

11 Troubleshooting
This chapter introduces you to the following topics:
• Solving common problems when operating the terminal
• Supporting the service partner in troubleshooting by provision of screen-
shots and logs
• Granting the service partner access to the terminal via remote mainte-
nance
• All error messages, possible causes and tips on how to rectify them

CAUTION!

If a technical failure occurs, the work process must be interrupted.

Continuation of working after technical failures can result in damage to the
terminal or the implement!

1. Stop working.
2. Look for a solution in this chapter of the operating instructions.
3. Contact your dealer if the problem persists.

Forced shut- In the event of a fault, the terminal may no longer respond to user inputs.
down 1. Press the ON/OFF button for 2 seconds.
→ The terminal shuts down.

2. Press the ON/OFF button for 1 second.

→ The terminal restarts.

CAUTION!

In a forced shut-down all internal supply voltages are switched off.

Unsaved data is lost. The terminal and its software are not damaged by the
switch-off.

Perform a forced shut-down only if it is absolutely unavoidable.

283 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Blue flash- If a hardware problem exists, the terminal switches off automatically. The LED
ing signals
of the ON/OFF button transmits a series of blue flashes.
of the
ON/OFF
button

The LED flashes once per second and, dependent on the error, 1 to 27 times
in succession. There is a two second pause at the end of the sequence. The
sequence then starts again from the beginning. This makes counting easier
for you.

Restart the terminal. If the terminal switches off again, and the LED of the
ON/OFF button flashes blue again, the problem still exists.

You can rectify the problems listed in the following table locally.

Flashing Cause/remedy
signals

7 The temperature measured in the terminal exceeds 95 °C. Possibly

the temperature sensor is defective.
/
Allow the terminal to cool before restarting. If the error reoccurs, the
terminal must be sent in.

25 The internal 12 V power supply is unstable.

/
There may be a problem with the applied voltage at the terminal.
Check the power supply.

26 The internal 5 V power supply is unstable.

/
There may be a problem with the applied voltage at the terminal.
Check the power supply.

27 The internal 3.3 V power supply is unstable.

/
There may be a problem with the applied voltage at the terminal.
Check the power supply.

For all other hardware problems, the terminal must be sent in. Tell the service
partner the number of flashes there are.

284 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

ON/OFF The ON/OFF button is permanently red if the terminal is operating under the
button is
Rescue System.
perma-
nently red → No error exists.

The Rescue System can only be used by Service.

Close the Rescue System and restart CCI.OS ( Chapter 10.3).

White flash- The ON/OFF button flashes during the switching on process.
ing signals
of the → No error exists.
ON/OFF
button

285 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

11.1 Problems during operation

This chapter lists problems that may occur during use of the terminal.

A suggestion is made for rectification for each problem.

Try to rectify the problem.

Contact your dealer if you cannot resolve the problem.

Problem Cause/remedy

The terminal does not The tractor does not switch off the supply to the In-cab
switch off, if you switch off connector.
the tractor ignition.
Switch the terminal off using the ON/OFF button or
disconnect cable A.

The terminal does not Terminal not connected to the ISOBUS.

switch on.
Connect the terminal to the ISOBUS as described in
 Chapter 2.

Ignition is not switched on.

Start the tractor.

The connected implement Implement is not connected or is incorrectly connected.

is not displayed on the
Ensure that the implement’s ISOBUS cable is correctly
terminal.
connected at the tractor.

Bus terminator missing.

Check whether a bus terminator must be attached to
the implement.

Incorrect configuration of the UT.

Configure the UT of the terminal according to this
manual.

The "Universal Terminal" is not on.

In the "ISOBUS settings" operating screen switch the
"Universal Terminal" on. ISOBUS settings are located
in Settings under "Apps".

286 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Problem Cause/remedy

Two ISOBUS terminals are The universal terminals have the same UT number and
present on the ISOBUS. thus cannot log on to the ISOBUS.
The connected implement
Set different UT numbers in the two terminals.
is not displayed on either
of the terminals.

An update has been in- The old version of the implement is still saved on the ter-
stalled on the implement. minal.
However, the terminal dis-
1. Disconnect the implement from the ISOBUS.
plays the implement’s old
operating screens. 2. Delete the implement from the terminal ( Chap-
ter 7.5.2).
3. Connect the implement to the ISOBUS.

The connected AUX control Incorrect configuration of the UT.

is not displayed.
1. Disconnect the AUX control from the ISOBUS.
2. Set the UT number to "1" in the terminal for CCI.UT.
3. Reconnect the AUX control to the ISOBUS.

The cable of the AUX con- You require A and Y cables:

trol only has an In-cab
1. Connect cable A to connector A on the terminal.
connector instead of a Y-
cable. 2. Insert the plug "UT" on cable Y into the "InCab" socket
on cable A.
3. Insert the plug "AUX" on cable Y into the In-cab cou-
pling of the AUX control.
4. Insert the "InCab" coupling on cable Y into the In-cab
panel connector of the tractor or the self-propelled im-
plement.

No implement functions Does the implement support operation via AUX control?
are displayed in the "AUX The implement operating instructions provide information.
assignment" operating
screen. The implement is not connected to the UT with UT num-
ber "1".
Move the implement into the UT with UT number "1".
Most implements offer a function for moving to another
UT.

287 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Problem Cause/remedy

No GPS data is displayed No power supply at the GPS receiver

in the information area of
Check the power supply to the GPS receiver.
the GPS settings.
GPS receiver not connected to the terminal
Check the connection of the GPS receiver with the ter-
minal.
→ If the position data is output via the serial port of
the GPS receiver, the receiver must be connected
to the RS232-I port of the terminal.
→ If CAN data is to be used, the receiver must be con-
nected to the CAN-Bus.

Incorrect GPS source selected

Under GPS settings check whether the GPS source is
selected that is currently being used.

Incorrect baud rate set

When using serial data under GPS settings, set the
same baud rate with which your receiver is configured.

Incorrect configuration of the receiver

To see how the receiver is configured, refer to the op-
erating instructions of your GPS receiver.

Incorrect assignment of the cable wiring

Use an original cable.

The implement is not connected to the UT with UT num-

ber "1".
Move the implement into the UT with UT number "1".
Most implements offer a function for moving to an-
other UT.

My ISOBUS implement has A second ISOBUS terminal with Task Controller is logged
the Task Controller func- in on the ISOBUS. The implement has connected to the
tion, however, it does not Task Controller of the other terminal.
register in the implement
Switch the Task Controller of the second ISOBUS ter-
list in CCI.Config. Also, I
minal off.
cannot use it for Section
Control or documentation.

288 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Problem Cause/remedy

I want to use the GPS re- Cable N is not suitable for operation of the A101.
ceiver A101 on the termi- → The contacts for the voltage signal V+ are not as-
nal and accordingly am signed.
using cables B and N. → The GPS receiver is not supplied with current.

You require a cable that has an M8 coupling for connec-

tion to cable B and a 12-pole coupling for connection to
the A101.

The warning symbol next The warning icon is displayed, if

to the tractor name is dis- • No tractor is selected
played, although I have • The distance C is not set for the implement mounting
set up the tractor. type.
Only if both conditions are met, will the warning symbol
not be displayed.
Select the tractor ( Chapter 6.10.1) and set distance
C for all implement mounting types ( Chapter 6.2.2).

I cannot connect my ISO- The Task Controller is not set up correctly on the terminal
BUS implement to
1. Switch the ISOBUS function Task Controller "on".
CCI.Convert. It does not
appear in the list of imple- 2. Set a Task Controller number.
ments in the CCI.Convert
3. Switch the app CCI.Control "on".
settings.
The implement is not connected to the ISOBUS.

The implement has no TC client or it is not connected to

the terminal.

289 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

11.2 Remote maintenance and diagnostics

If you have a persistent problem that you cannot resolve on your own, your
service partner will be more than happy to help.
Describe in detail the work steps that led to the error. If requested by your
service partner, provide a screenshot ( Chapter 11.2.1) or the log ( Chap-
ter 11.2.3).
Using remote maintenance, you can demonstrate the problem to the service
partner directly on the terminal ( Chapter 11.2.2).

11.2.1 Take a screenshot

A picture says more than a thousand words.
If you are having problems operating the terminal or ISOBUS implement, you
can capture a screenshot and send it to your service partner:

Prior prepa-
ration
Connect a flash drive to the terminal.

Press on the left time in the status bar (1) until a message is displayed in
the status bar (2).
→ The screenshot is automatically saved in the root directory on the flash
drive.

290 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

11.2.2 Remote maintenance using Remote View

If you are having problems operating the terminal or ISOBUS implement, you
can grant your service partner remote access.
You are the long arm of the service partner:
→ The service partner can see the screen contents, but cannot perform any
actions on the terminal.

NOTE

Not all service partners offer remote maintenance.

NOTE

Remote maintenance is only possible after you have granted your

permission.
Access to the terminal via the Internet is only possible subject to the follow-
ing conditions:
• You have switched on remote maintenance
• You have shared the session code with the service partner

Only switch on remote maintenance if expressly asked to do so by your ser-

vice partner.
→ You can end the session at any time by turning off remote maintenance.

DATA PROTECTION

The service partner only has read-only access to the terminal

The service partner can see the screen content of the terminal; the service
partner has no access to it beyond viewing it.
Above all, the following applies:
• The service partner cannot perform any actions on the terminal.
• The service partner cannot upload any data to the terminal and cannot
download any data from the terminal.

DATA PROTECTION

The session code is only valid for one session

The terminal creates a new session code for each session.

291 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Prior prepa-
ration
Connect the terminal to the Internet.

1. Open the operating screen "Re-

mote View":

2. Switch "Remote View" "on".

→ The session starts.
→ The session code is displayed.

3. Inform your service partner of the Session Code.

→ The service partner sees the screen contents.
→ The status bar goes blue.
→ The mouse pointer is displayed.

4. Demonstrate the problem.

5. Open the operating screen "Re-

mote View":

6. Switch "Remote View" "off".

→ The session ends.
→ The status bar takes on the dark background colour.

292 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

11.2.3 Export log

The terminal records a log. The log is only saved on the terminal and is not
transmitted.
If you are having problems operating the terminal or ISOBUS implement, you
can send the log to your service partner:

Prior prepa-
ration
Connect a flash drive to the terminal.

1. Press the "Settings" button.

→ The "Settings" operating screen is displayed.
2. Press the "Diagnostics" button.
→ The "Diagnostics" operating screen is displayed.
3. Press the button "Export".
→ The log is saved on the flash drive.
4. Press the "Settings" button.
→ The process is completed.

11.2.4 ISOBUS
For troubleshooting, the terminal provides you with detailed information about
activities on the ISOBUS:
• List of all participants logged in on the ISOBUS
• Loading of the ISOBUS and evaluation of data packets on the ISOBUS

You can provide your service partner with a recording of data traffic on the
ISOBUS:

Connect a flash drive and press "CAN trace".

→ Two files with the file extension *.trc are saved in the main directory on
the flash drive.

293 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

11.3 Messages
Messages indicate an operating error or an error condition; some messages
also give you the option to cancel the execution of a command.

Messages are dialogue windows, interrupt the program flow and must be
acknowledged. Each message is identified by a unique error number.

1. Type
2. Message number
3. Message text
4. Button "OK"
5. Button "Cancel"

"Caution" type messages can be acknowledged in 2 ways:

Cancel
→ The started action is aborted,
→ The previous condition is restored.

OK
→ Message is understood, I want to continue.

"Warning" type messages have no "Cancel" button.

Read the message. and confirm it with "OK".

294 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

14 Warning
/
<Number> logs have been saved on the flash drive. <Number> remain. The flash drive is full.
Connect a new flash drive.
/
You want to save all the logs created on the terminal on the flash drive. The free storage on the
flash drive is insufficient. Only some of the logs could be saved.

 Ensure that the flash drive has at least 10 MB of free storage.

21 Warning
/
Exporting of the licence data has failed.
Connect a flash drive and repeat the process.
/
You want to update the licence data via flash drive. Saving of the TAN on the flash drive has
failed.

Ensure that:
• The flash drive is functioning
• The write-protection switch of the flash drive is in the "off" position
• The flash drive has at least 100 kB of free storage

36 Warning
/
The log could not be exported. Connect a flash drive and repeat the process.
/
You want to save all the logs created on the terminal to a flash drive. The terminal has not
recognised the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.

If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

295 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

7035 Warning
/
No flash drive connected.
/
You want to export the log. Saving of data on the flash drive has failed. The terminal has not
recognised the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.

If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

31001 Caution
/
Disconnect all implements from the terminal before restoring the factory settings. Check all set-
tings once the process is completed.
/
Safety note.
 Follow the instructions.

31002 Caution
/
Do you want to deactivate the app?
/
Confirmation query.
 To switch the app off, press "OK".
 To interrupt the process, press "Cancel".
→ The app remains switched on.

31003 Warning
/
The time zone cannot be set.
/
You want to change the time zone in the system settings. The change fails.
 Switch the terminal off and on again.
 Change the time zone. Use another time zone as a test.

296 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

31004 Caution
/
You are switching the "TECU" ISOBUS function off.
The terminal will not send any more speed information over the ISOBUS.
/
Confirmation query.
 To switch the TECU ISOBUS function off, press "OK".
 Press "Cancel" if the terminal is to remain logged on to the ISOBUS as TECU.

31005 Caution
/
You are switching the "Task Controller" ISOBUS function off.
It will only be possible to use CCI.Config, CCI.Control and CCI.Command with limited functional-
ity.
/
Confirmation query.
 To switch off the ISOBUS Task Controller function, press "OK".
 Press "Cancel" if the terminal is to remain logged on to the ISOBUS as Task Controller.

31006 Caution
/
Do you want to change the Task Controller number?
/
Confirmation query.
 To change the Task Controller number, press "OK".
 If the Task Controller number is to be retained, press "Cancel".

31007 Caution
/
You are switching the "UT" ISOBUS function off.
The terminal can no longer be used to operate an ISOBUS implement.
/
Confirmation query.
 To switch ISOBUS UT function off, press "OK".
 If the terminal is to remain logged on to the ISOBUS as UT, press "Cancel".

31008 Caution
/
You are switching the "File Server" ISOBUS function off.
The terminal will not provide any storage space for the ISOBUS participants.
/
Confirmation query.
 To switch File Server ISOBUS function off, press "OK".
 If the terminal is to remain logged on to the ISOBUS as File Server, press "Cancel".

297 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

31009 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the database?
All tasks, fields, and implement settings are deleted.
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete the database, press "OK".
→ All tractors, implements, fields and tasks, master data, totals and location-dependent data
will be deleted.
 Press "Cancel", if the database is to be retained.

31010 Caution
/
You are switching the "AUX-N Terminal Functions" ISOBUS function off.
The terminal can no longer be operated with the AUX operating unit.
/
If the ISOBUS function "AUX N Terminal Functions" is switched on, you can operate the terminal
with an AUX control. You have switched off the factory-activated ISOBUS function.
 Press "OK".
→ The switch "AUX-N Terminal Functions" is "off".
→ The terminal no longer registers its AUX-N Terminal Functions with the ISOBUS.
→ You can no longer operate the terminal with an AUX control.

31013 Caution
/
Internal error. Remote maintenance cannot be started.
Repeat the process in a few minutes.
/
An internal error has occurred. The connection to the remote station cannot be established for
an unknown reason.
→ Remote maintenance of the terminal is not currently possible.

 Repeat the process after a few minutes.

32000 Warning
/
No bus participants have been found. The terminal must be restarted for safety reasons. Press
"OK" to continue.
/
Confirmation query.
 Press "OK".
→ The terminal restarts.

298 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

32001 Warning
/
Internal error. Connection to the ISOBUS lost. Restart the terminal.
/
An internal error has occurred. The connection to the ISOBUS is automatically interrupted.
→ Operation of the implement is no longer possible.
The terminal must be restarted.

 Press "OK".
→ The terminal restarts.
→ The connection to the implement is interrupted for the duration of the restart.

Before restarting screenshots can be recorded for fault analysis or the log can be exported:
1. Press "Cancel".
→ The terminal is not shut down.
→ The error message is closed.
→ The connection to the ISOBUS remains interrupted.
→ Instead of the ISB, the button "No ISOBUS" is displayed:

2. Take screenshots of the active apps and the settings and export the log. Send this
information to your service partner.
3. Press the button "No ISOBUS".
→ The terminal restarts.

32002 Warning
/
Internal error.
Connection to the ISOBUS lost. Restart the terminal.
/
 32001

32003 Warning
/
The ISOBUS functions of the terminal have been disabled. You require version <No.> of the
APA-Supervisor. Repeat the CCI.OS update.
/
Without the named version of the APA-Supervisor, the ISOBUS functions UT, Task Controller,
TECU and File Server cannot be run.
 Contact your service partner.
→ The service partner will install the version of APA-Supervisor referred to in the message.

33003 Warning
/
Login of user <Username> has failed. The entered password is incorrect.
/
You have entered an invalid password.
 Repeat the process.

299 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

33004 Warning
/
Login of user <Username> has failed. The user is unknown.
/
You have entered an invalid user name.
 Request a valid user name from the terminal administrator.

33006 Warning
/
User <Username> is logged in and cannot be deleted.
/
The logged in user cannot delete themselves.
 Log on to the terminal as an administrator and repeat the process.

33009 Warning
/
User name <Username> is invalid. A valid user name is 1-32 characters long.
The special characters \/:*?""<>| are not allowed.
/
You want to create a new user. The user name must not contain any of the special characters
referred to in the message.

33010 Warning
/
Changes to standard user <Username> are not possible.
/
The user profile cannot be changed.

33012 Warning
/
User name <Username> is already in use. Select another user name.
/
You want to create a new user. A user with this user name already exists.
 Select another user name.

34000 Update
/
The Rescue System update has failed. Repeat the process.
/
The update has failed for an unknown reason.
 Repeat the process. Leave the flash drive inserted for the duration of the update and do not
switch the terminal off.

34001 Warning
/
The CCI.OS-Update has failed.
/
The update has failed for an unknown reason.
 Repeat the process. Leave the flash drive inserted for the duration of the update and do not
switch the terminal off.

300 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34002 Warning
/
The terminal could not be disconnected from the ISOBUS.
/
Confirmation query.
 Press "OK".

34003 Warning
/
The backup has failed.
/
You want to create a backup, e.g. before carrying out a CCI.OS update. The backup cannot be
created or cannot be saved on the flash drive.

Ensure that:
• The flash drive is functioning
• The write-protection switch of the flash drive is in the "off" position
• The flash drive has at least 100 kB of free storage

 Repeat the process.

34004 Caution
/
Do you want to run the CCI.OS-Update?
The terminal cannot be used during the update.
/
Confirmation query.
An update of CCI.OS could take several minutes. The terminal may restart several times. The
terminal and the ISOBUS implement cannot be operated for the duration of the update.
 To Start the update, press "OK".
 Press "Cancel", if the update is not to be performed.

34005 Caution
/
Do you want to create the backup?
The terminal cannot be used while the backup is being created.
/
Confirmation query.
The backup could take several minutes. The terminal and the ISOBUS implement cannot be op-
erated for the duration of the backup.
 To create the backup, press "OK".
 Press "Cancel", if you do not want to perform the backup.

34006 Caution
/
Do you want to restart the terminal?
/
Confirmation query.
 To restart the terminal, press "OK".
→ The connection to the implement is interrupted for the duration of the restart.
 If you want to continue working without restarting, press "Cancel".

301 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34007 Caution
/
Do you want to run the CCI.OS-Update?
/
Confirmation query.
An update of CCI.OS could take several minutes. The terminal may restart several times. The
terminal and the ISOBUS implement cannot be operated for the duration of the update.
 To Start the update, press "OK".
 Press "Cancel", if the update is not to be performed.

34008 Warning
/
Not enough free space on the flash drive. Use a flash drive with additional free space of at least
<Number> bytes.
/
You want to save data to the flash drive, e.g. a backup or a log. The free space on the flash
drive is insufficient.
 Connect a flash drive with enough free space to the terminal.

34009 Caution
/
Do you want to update the Rescue System?
The terminal cannot be used during the update.
/
Confirmation query.
The update of the Rescue System may take several minutes. The terminal may restart several
times. The terminal and the ISOBUS implement cannot be operated for the duration of the up-
date.
 To Start the update, press "OK".
 Press "Cancel", if the update is not to be performed.

34010 Warning
/
The Rescue System update has failed.
/
 Repeat the process. Leave the flash drive inserted for the duration of the update and do not
switch the terminal off.

34011 Warning
/
The update of the "APA-Supervisor" module has failed.
Repeat the CCI.OS update or perform the update of the APA-Supervisor in the Rescue System.
/
 Repeat the update. Leave the flash drive inserted for the duration of the update and do not
switch the terminal off.

If the update of the APA-Supervisor fails again, the APA-Supervisor must be updated separately.
 Contact your service partner.
→ The service partner has a special installation file.
→ The service partner performs the update in the terminal’s Rescue System.

The Rescue System is not described in these operating instructions.

 Contact your dealer.

302 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34012 Warning
/
The update of the "System-Supervisor" module has failed.
Repeat the CCI.OS update or perform the update of the System-Supervisor in the Rescue Sys-
tem.
/
 Repeat the update. Leave the flash drive inserted for the duration of the update and do not
switch the terminal off.

If the update of the System-Supervisor fails again, the System-Supervisor must be updated
separately.
 Contact your service partner.
→ The service partner has a special installation file.
→ The service partner performs the update in the terminal’s Rescue System.

The Rescue System is not described in these operating instructions.

 Contact your dealer.

34013 Warning
/
The update of the "Bootloader" module has failed.
Repeat the CCI.OS update or perform the update of the Bootloader in the Rescue System.
/
 Repeat the update. Leave the flash drive inserted for the duration of the update and do not
switch the terminal off.

If the update of the U-Boot fails again, the U-Boot must be updated separately.
→ You need a special installation file.
→ The update must be performed in the Rescue System of the terminal.

The Rescue System is not described in these operating instructions.

 Contact your dealer.

303 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34014 Warning
/
The backup could not be restored.
1. Press ON/OFF button for 12 seconds.
2. Press the ON/OFF button and start the Rescue System
3. Restore another backup or reset the terminal to its delivery state.
/
You want to restore a backup, e.g. to install the previous version of CCI.OS after a failed up-
date. Restoration of the backup has failed.
Start the Rescue System and repeat the process. If necessary, use another backup:
1. Press ON/OFF button for 12 seconds.
→ The terminal beeps softly several times.
2. Release the ON/OFF button and then press it briefly.
→ The Rescue System of the terminal starts.
3. Press the "Restore backup" button.

If restoring of the backup fails again, you can reset the terminal to its delivery state.
 In the Rescue System press the button "Restore delivery state".

34015 Warning
/
The terminal cannot be reset to the delivery state.
1. Press ON/OFF button for 12 seconds.
2. Press the ON/OFF button and start the Rescue System.
3. Restore a different backup.
/
You want to reset the terminal to its delivery state, before you transfer the device to another
user. The delivery state cannot be restored.
Start the Rescue System and repeat the process. If necessary, use another backup:
1. Press ON/OFF button for 12 seconds.
→ The terminal beeps softly several times.
2. Release the ON/OFF button and then press it briefly.
→ The Rescue System of the terminal starts.
3. Press the "Restore delivery state" button.

 If the delivery state cannot be recreated, contact your dealer.

34017 Caution
/
Do you want to download the CCI.OS-Update?
/
Confirmation query. The size of the update file is several MBs. Downloading it over a mobile
phone network will incur a data charge.

 To start the download, press "OK".

 Press "Cancel", if you do not want to download the update.

304 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34018 Caution
/
The CCI.OS-Update could not be downloaded.
/
The download update has failed. Either the Internet connection is unstable or the update server
has malfunctioned.
 Repeat the process.

34019 Caution
/
Do you want to cancel the process?
/
Confirmation query. You want to cancel an active process.
 To interrupt the process, press "OK".
 To continue the process, press "Cancel".

34020 Warning
/
The CCI.OS-Update has failed.
Repeat the process.
/
The installation of the CCI.OS update is incomplete. Some apps could not be installed for an un-
known reason.
→ Do not use the terminal until you have been able to fully install CCI.OS.

 Press "OK" and repeat the update.

34986 Update
/
The CCI.OS-Update has been downloaded. Now perform the update.
/
Confirmation query.
A CCI.OS update has been downloaded from the Internet and saved on the terminal. The update
can now be installed without a connection to the Internet.
The update may take several minutes. The terminal may restart several times. The terminal and
the ISOBUS implement cannot be operated for the duration of the update.
 To perform the CCI.OS update, press "OK".
→ The terminal restarts several times. Do not interrupt the update process.
 If you want to perform the CCI.OS update at a later time, press "Cancel".

34986 Update
/
CCI.OS update available.
> Download the new version: Size <File Size>
/
If the terminal is connected to the Internet, an automatic check is performed as to whether a
new version of CCI.OS is available for your terminal.
→ This message is displayed if a new version is available.

 To start the download, press "OK".

→ The size of the update file is several MBs. Downloading it over a mobile phone network
will incur a data charge.
 To interrupt the process, press "Cancel".

305 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34987 Update
/
CCI.OS updates available. Select an update.
/
If the terminal is connected to the Internet, an automatic check is performed as to whether a
new version of CCI.OS is available for your terminal.
→ This message appears if several new versions are available.

 To select an update, press "OK".

The selection list "CCI.OS Updates" is displayed.
 Select an update and press the "Download" button.
→ The update is downloaded.
→ The size of the update file is several MBs. Downloading it over a mobile phone network
will incur a data charge.

34989 Update
/
The CCI.OS-Update has been downloaded. Now perform the update.
/
Confirmation query. A CCI.OS update has been downloaded from the Internet for your terminal.
The update is now available on the terminal and can be installed.
The update may take several minutes. The terminal may restart several times. The terminal and
the ISOBUS implement cannot be operated for the duration of the update.
 To perform the CCI.OS update, press "OK".
→ The terminal restarts several times. Do not interrupt the update process.
 If you want to perform the CCI.OS update at a later time, press "Cancel".

34990 Caution
/
The Rescue System update has been carried out.
/
The operation has been successfully completed
 Confirm the message with "OK".

34991 Update
/
The CCI.OS-Update has been carried out.
/
The operation has been successfully completed
 Confirm the message with "OK".

34992 Caution
/
You have reset the terminal to the delivery state.
/
The operation has been successfully completed.
 Confirm the message with "OK".

306 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

34993 Caution
/
The backup has been restored.
/
The operation has been successfully completed.
 Confirm the message with "OK".

35000 Caution
/
The connected flash drive cannot be read. Use a different flash drive.
/
The flash drive cannot be read by the terminal.
 Use a different flash drive.

36000 Warning
/
The logs could not be exported.
Connect a flash drive and repeat the process.
/
You want to save all the logs created on the terminal to a flash drive. No flash drive is connected
or the terminal did not recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.
If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:
 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.
If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

36001 Warning
/
The log level could not be set.
/
The log level should only be set by the developer or Service.

37004 Caution
/
Connection to WiFi failed.
The password entered is invalid.
/
You have entered an incorrect WiFi password.
1. In the "WiFi networks" selection list, press and hold the button with the WiFi network.
→ A context menu is displayed.
2. Select "Edit".
→ The window for password entry is displayed.
3. Correct password and confirm entry.

307 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

39000 Warning
/
Only %2% of internal storage left.
Export all logs to a flash drive to clear storage space.
/
You have created so many logs, that the terminal’s internal storage is nearly full. Free up some
internal storage so that the terminal does not become unstable during operation.
 Export all logs to a flash drive ( Chapter 11.2.3).

39001 Warning
/
Only <Number>% or <Number> MB of internal storage left.
/
The terminal’s internal storage is nearly full. Free up some internal storage so that the terminal
does not become unstable during operation.
 Export all logs to a flash drive ( Chapter 11.2.3).
 Export all completed tasks ( Chapter 8.3.2).

39992 Warning
/
The event log could not be created.
/
Internal error. The cause is unknown.
 Repeat the process.

40003 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the licence data?
Confirm the message and restart the terminal.
/
This message is only displayed in developer mode.

Confirmation query.
You want to delete the terminal licence and licence key of the apps:
→ The terminal can only be used for implement operation.
→ CCI.Command, CCI.Control, CCI.Assist and Auto Guidance can no longer be used.

 To delete the licence data, press "OK".

 To retain the Licence data, press "Cancel".

40005 Warning
/
The licence data could not be deleted.
/
You want to delete the licence data saved on the terminal. The process has failed for an un-
known reason.
 Repeat the process.

308 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

40006 Warning
/
No licence data are present.
/
This message is only displayed in developer mode.
The licence data should be deleted. However no licence data is present on the terminal.

40007 Warning
/
No Internet connection. Update the licence data using the flash drive.
/
You want to update the licence data over the Internet. This is the fastest and easiest update
method. However, the terminal is not connected to the Internet.
 Connect the terminal to the Internet ( Chapter 4.3.4).
 Update the licence data.

40008 Warning
/
Updating of the licence data failed. Update the licence data using the flash drive.
/
You want to update the licence data over the Internet. This is the fastest and easiest update
method. The terminal is connected to the Internet, however the licence server signals an error.
 Update the licence data using the flash drive ( Chapter 4.3.3).

40009 Warning
/
Updating of the licence data failed. Update the licence data using the flash drive.
/
You have connected the terminal to the Internet ( Chapter 4.3.4) and have chosen to update
the licence data via the Internet. The licence server signals an error.
 Update the licence data using the flash drive ( Chapter 4.3.3).

40010 Warning
/
Licence data update failed.
Your service partner must store the terminal’s public key on the licence server.
/
You want to update the licence data. The public key of the terminal must be stored by your ser-
vice partner on the myCCI licence server.
 Contact your dealer or service partner.

41000 Warning
/
Server error. Try again later.
/
You want to connect the terminal to agrirouter. The terminal is connected to the Internet, but
agrirouter cannot be reached.
 Repeat the process in a few minutes’ time.

309 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

41002 Warning
/
Registration at agrirouter has failed.
/
You have entered the registration code in the agrirouter settings. This is received under the URL
www.myagrirouter.com. The terminal is connected to the Internet. Registration with the agrirou-
ter has failed.
→ Presumably the entered registration code is invalid.

 Read out the registration code for your account under www.myagrirouter.com.
 Re-enter the registration code at the terminal.

41008 Warning
/
Login failed. The entered ID is invalid.
/
The Application ID and the Certification ID are preset in the agrirouter settings. The presetting
has been changed by you or is invalid for another reason.
 Contact your dealer for the correct IDs and enter them in the terminal ( Chapter 4.3.5).
 Switch agrirouter on.
→ The terminal logs in to the agrirouter using the new IDs.

41009 Warning
/
Login failed. The entered internet address is invalid.
/
The Internet address of the registration service is preset in the agrirouter settings. The preset-
ting has been changed by you or is invalid for another reason.
 Contact your dealer for the correct address of the registration service and enter it in the ter-
minal ( Chapter 4.3.5).
 Switch agrirouter on.
→ The terminal logs in to the agrirouter using the new address.

41010 Warning
/
A receiver for implement data is missing.
In my-agrirouter.com set up an end point for telemetry.
/
"Telemetry" is switched on in the agrirouter settings. The terminal sends the position, imple-
ment and process data to agrirouter every 30 seconds, but no receiver is set up for the data in
agrirouter.
 Set up an endpoint for the terminal data in agrirouter.
or
 Switch off the "Telemetry" function ( Chapter 4.3.5).

41011 Warning
/
The registration code has expired. In my-agrirouter.com create a new code and enter it in the
terminal.
/
Your agrirouter registration code is no longer valid.
 Go to www.my-agrirouter.com to create a new registration code for your account.
 Enter the new registration code at the terminal.

310 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

50000 Caution
/
Implement could not be loaded.
/
The Object Pool of the implement cannot be displayed clearly by the terminal. Operation of the
implement is thus not possible.
1. Disconnect the implement form the ISOBUS and wait 5 seconds.
2. Reconnect the implement to the ISOBUS.

If the error cannot be cleared, there is probably a fundamental problem with the implement:
 Contact the implement manufacturer or its service partner.

50001 Caution
/
The connection to the implement is lost.
/
The terminal no longer has a connection to the implement.
• You have disconnected the implement from the ISOBUS or
• a connection problem has occurred on the ISOBUS.

1. Disconnect the implement form the ISOBUS and wait 5 seconds.

2. Reconnect the implement to the ISOBUS.

50002 Warning
/
The automatic AUX assignment has failed. Perform the AUX assignment manually.
/
The AUX assignment must only be performed once. The AUX assignment is available again after
a restart of the implement and the AUX control and is performed automatically. The automatic
AUX assignment has failed.
 Carry out the AUX assignment manually ( Chapter 7.4.1).

50003 Warning
/
The AUX assignment has failed. Repeat the process.
/
If the error cannot be cleared, there is probably a fundamental problem with the implement or
the AUX control:
 Contact the implement manufacturer or its service partner.

50004 Caution
/
No connection to implement <Name>.
The implement cannot be operated using the AUX operating unit.
/
The terminal no longer has a connection to the implement. This may be for the following rea-
sons:
• You have disconnected the implement from the ISOBUS
• A connection problem has occurred on the ISOBUS.

1. Disconnect the implement form the ISOBUS and wait 5 seconds.

2. Reconnect the implement to the ISOBUS.

311 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

50005 Warning
/
No connection to AUX.
The implement cannot be operated using the AUX operating unit.
/
The terminal no longer has a connection to the AUX control. This may be for the following rea-
sons:
• You have disconnected the AUX control from the ISOBUS
• A connection problem has occurred on the ISOBUS

1. Disconnect the AUX control form the ISOBUS and wait 5 seconds.
2. Reconnect the AUX control to the ISOBUS.

50006 Warning
/
The AUX assignment has failed. The AUX operating unit is signalling an error.
/
 Repeat the process.

If the error cannot be cleared, there is probably a fundamental problem with the AUX control:
 Contact your dealer.

50007 Warning
/
The AUX assignment has failed. The implement is not responding.
/
1. Disconnect the implement and AUX control form the ISOBUS and wait for 5 seconds.
2. Reconnect the implement and AUX control to the ISOBUS.
3. Repeat the AUX assignment ( Chapter 7.4.1).

If the error cannot be cleared, there is probably a fundamental problem with the implement or
the AUX control:
 Contact the implement manufacturer or its service partner.

50008 Warning
/
The AUX assignment has failed. The implement is signalling an error.
/
1. Disconnect the implement and AUX control form the ISOBUS and wait for 5 seconds.
2. Reconnect the implement and AUX control to the ISOBUS.
3. Repeat the AUX assignment ( Chapter 7.4.1).

If the error cannot be cleared, there is probably a fundamental problem with the implement or
the AUX control:
 Contact the implement manufacturer or its service partner.

312 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

50009 Warning
/
The AUX assignment has failed. The AUX operating unit is not responding.
/
1. Disconnect the implement and AUX control form the ISOBUS and wait for 5 seconds.
2. Reconnect the implement and AUX control to the ISOBUS.
3. Repeat the AUX assignment ( Chapter 7.4.1).

If the error cannot be cleared, there is probably a fundamental problem with the implement or
the AUX control:
 Contact the implement manufacturer or its service partner.

50010 Warning
/
The selected UT number is already being used. > Select another UT number.
/
The UT is the ISOBUS function for operating ISOBUS implements. Generally each ISOBUS termi-
nal has a UT. Each UT on the ISOBUS must receive a unique UT number. Therefore if you oper-
ate multiple ISOBUS terminals and thus UTs on the ISOBUS, then you must assign each UT a
unique number.
 The CCI 800/CCI 1200 has two UTs.
 The UT with which you want to operate the AUX control, must receive the UT number 1.

The error message appears if two UTs have the same UT number.
 Change the UT number of the UT on the CCI 800/CCI 1200 or on the other ISOBUS terminal.

50012 Caution
/
The implements could not be exported. Check that a flash drive is connected.
/
You want to save one or more implements to a flash drive. No flash drive is connected or the
terminal did not recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.

If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

313 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

50995 Caution
/
Do you want to change the UT number? The connection to the implement will be interrupted and
CCI.UT restarted.
/
Confirmation query. You have changed the UT number, e.g. to ensure that all UTs connected to
the ISOBUS have different UT numbers.

 To accept the changes, press "OK".

→ The connection to the implement will be interrupted and CCI.UT restarted.
→ No implement operation will be possible for the duration of the process.
 To retain the UT number, press "Cancel".

50996 Warning
/
This UT number is assigned to another CCI.UT.
Select another UT number.
/
You have changed the UT number CCI.UT A (or B) , e.g. to ensure that all UTs connected to the
ISOBUS have different UT numbers. However, the number you want to assign to CCI.UT A (or
B) is already assigned to CCI.UT B (or CCI.UT A).
 Set another UT number.

50997 Caution
/
The terminal must be restarted to apply the changes.
/
Confirmation query. Some changes only become effective once the terminal has been restarted.

 To restart the terminal, press "OK".

→ No implement operation will be possible for the duration of the process.

51001 Warning
/
No flash drive connected.
/
The selected function requires a flash drive. No flash drive is connected or the terminal did not
recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.
If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:
 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.
If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

314 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51003 Warning
/
The tasks could not be imported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free storage space on the terminal is insufficient

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

51005 Warning
/
The tasks could not be exported.
/
You want to save tasks to a flash drive. The tasks cannot be saved on the flash drive.

Ensure that:
• The flash drive is functioning
• The write-protection switch of the flash drive is in the "off" position
• The flash drive has at least 100 kB of free storage

 Repeat the process. The flash drive must remain connected to the terminal until the process
has completed.
→ The notification 51004 "Tasks exported" is displayed.

51007 Warning
/
The Shape file could not be imported.
/
Did you remove the flash drive before the action was completed?
 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

51009 Warning
/
The Shape file could not be exported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• You are trying to export a field that does not have a field boundary.
• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free space on the flash drive is insufficient
• The flash drive is write-protected

 In map view, record the field boundary.

 Use a non-write-protected flash drive with enough free space.
 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

315 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51011 Warning
/
The report could not be exported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free space on the flash drive is insufficient
• The flash drive is write-protected

 Use a non-write-protected flash drive with enough free space.

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

51013 Warning
/
The tasks could not be exported.
/

The error can have the following causes:

• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free space on the flash drive is insufficient
• The flash drive is write-protected

 Use a non-write-protected flash drive with enough free space.

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

51014 Warning
/
The task could not be deleted.
/
Deleting the task also deletes the application maps, totals, and location-based data associated
with the task. If one of these steps fails, the task cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The task will not be deleted.

 If you import new tasks in ISO-XML format, all the tasks stored on the terminal are overwrit-
ten. Ultimately this task too will then be deleted.

51015 Warning
/
The driver could not be deleted.
/
A driver is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the driver is deleted, all references are also
deleted. If one of these steps fails, the driver cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The driver will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other drivers, all master data and all tasks are then also deleted.

316 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51016 Warning
/
The operation could not be deleted.
/
An operation is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the operation is deleted, all references
are also deleted. If this step fails, the operation cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The operation will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other operations, all master data and all tasks are then also de-
leted.

51017 Warning
/
The technique could not be deleted.
/
A technique is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the technique is deleted, all references
are also deleted. If this step fails, the technique cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The technique will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other techniques, all master data and all tasks are then also de-
leted.

51018 Warning
/
The customer could not be deleted.
/
A customer is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the customer is deleted, all references
are also deleted. If one of these steps fails, the customer cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The customer will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other customers, all master data and all tasks are then also de-
leted.

51019 Warning
/
The farm could not be deleted.
/
A farm is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the farm is deleted, all references are also
deleted. If one of these steps fails, the farm cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The farm will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other farms, all master data and all tasks are then also deleted.

317 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51020 Warning
/
The field could not be deleted.
/
A field is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the field is deleted, all references are also
deleted. If one of these steps fails, the field cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The field will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other fields, all master data and all tasks are then also deleted.

51021 Warning
/
The product could not be deleted.
/

A product is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the product is deleted, all references are
also deleted. If one of these steps fails, the product cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The product will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
 In this case, however, all other products, all master data and all tasks are then also deleted.

51022 Warning
/
The Task Controller function of the implement is defective. Rate Control and Section Control
cannot be performed.
/
The implement Task Controller has an error.
→ Rate Control and Section Control cannot be performed.

In rare cases, the implement's Task Controller sends incorrect data that is rejected by the termi-
nal.
1. In CCI.Control settings, switch on "Peer Control" ( Chapter 8.1).
2. Restart the terminal.

If the error cannot be resolved by turning off Peer Control, proceed as follows:
 In the CCI.Control settings, switch on "Peer Control".
 Contact your dealer.

318 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51025 Warning
/
agrirouter could not send the tasks.
/
You have exported tasks, reports or other data to agrirouter. The data could not be sent to agri-
router from the terminal. The data is saved in the outbox of the agrirouter.
→ Data in the outbox must be sent manually.

1. Connect the terminal to the Internet.

2. Manually send the data in the outbox ( Chapter 4.3.5).

51026 Warning
/
The task could not be started. An application map in the task is not assigned to any implement.
/
The task contains several application maps. However, one of the application maps is not as-
signed to any implement.

1. Open "Task" detailed view and press on the "Application maps" button.
2. Assign an implement or boom to each task application map.

51031 Warning
/
No field was found at the current position.
Create the field.
/
Field Finder could not find a field for the current position in the entire task data.
 Create a new field and add the task to the field.

51032 Warning
/
Field %1 has already been selected.
/
You have triggered the "Field Finder" function, although the field corresponding to the current
position has already been selected.
 Acknowledge the error message with "OK" and continue processing.

51034 Warning
/
The report could not be exported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free space on the flash drive is insufficient
• The flash drive is write-protected

 Use a non-write-protected flash drive with enough free space.

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

319 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51036 Warning
/
The field could not be exported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free space on the flash drive is insufficient
• The flash drive is write-protected

 Use a non-write-protected flash drive with enough free space.

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

51037 Warning
/
The crop type could not be deleted.
/
A crop type is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the crop type is deleted, all references
are also deleted. If this step fails, the crop type cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The crop type will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
→ In this case, however, all other crop types, all master data and all tasks are then also de-
leted.

51038 Warning
/
The crop variety could not be deleted.
/
A crop variety is frequently referenced in multiple tasks. If the crop variety is deleted, all refer-
ences are also deleted. If this step fails, the crop variety cannot be deleted.
 Press "OK".
→ The crop variety will not be deleted.

Alternately, you can also delete the entire database ( Chapter 4.3).
→ In this case, however, all other crop varieties, all master data and all tasks are then also de-
leted.

51039 Caution
/
Delete all tasks?
&gt; The application maps of the tasks will also be deleted!
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete all tasks, confirm the query with "OK".
→ All tasks including the application maps, totals and location-based data are deleted.
→ The fields and master data are not deleted.
 If you do not want to delete the tasks, press "Cancel".

320 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

51040 Caution
/
Delete all application maps?
&gt; Maps belonging to a task are not deleted!
/
Confirmation query.
All application maps that you import into the terminal, are stored in the map archive. Deleting
empties the map archive.
 To delete all application maps in the map archive, confirm the query with "OK".
→ Application maps belonging to a task are not deleted.
 If you do not want to delete the application maps, press "Cancel".

51041 Caution
/
Delete all fields?
&gt; Tasks and application maps of the fields will also be deleted!
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete all fields, confirm the query with "OK".
→ All fields, tasks including the application maps, totals and location-based data are deleted.
→ The master data is not deleted.
 If you do not want to delete the fields, press "Cancel".

51042 Caution
/
Do you want to empty the inbox?
/
Confirmation query.
 To empty the agrirouter inbox, confirm the query with "OK".
 If you do not want empty the inbox, press "Cancel".

51043 Caution
/
Delete all customers?
&gt; Fields, tasks and application maps of the customers will also be deleted!
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete all customers, confirm the query with "OK".
→ All customers are deleted.
→ All farms, fields and tasks assigned to a customer are deleted, including totals and loca-
tion-based data.
→ Other master data is retained.
 If you do not want to delete the customers, press "Cancel".

51044 Caution
/
Do you really want to delete all operations?
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete all operations, confirm the query with "OK".
→ All operations are deleted.
→ All tasks containing an operation are deleted, including totals and location-based data.
 If you do not want to delete the operations, press "Cancel".

321 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52001 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the field boundary?
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete the field boundary, confirm the query with "OK".
 To cancel the deletion, confirm the query with "Cancel".
→ The field boundary will not be deleted.

52002 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the headland?
/
To delete the headland, confirm the query with "OK".
 To cancel the deletion, confirm the query with "Cancel".
→ The headland will not be deleted.

52003 Warning
/
First calculate or record the field boundary. Then create the new headland.
/
Confirmation query.
 Confirm the query with "OK".

The surround headland can only be calculated, if a field boundary is present.

1. Record the field boundary or calculate the field boundary ( Chapter 9.3).
2. Create headland ( Chapter 9.4.2).

52004 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the worked area?
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete the worked area, confirm the query with "OK".
 To cancel the deletion, confirm the query with "Cancel".
→ The worked area will not be deleted.

52006 Warning
/
The field boundary could not be exported.
/

The error can have the following causes:

• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free space on the flash drive is insufficient
• The flash drive is write-protected

 Use a non-write-protected flash drive with enough free space.

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

322 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52007 Caution
/
The field could not be exported. Check that a flash drive is connected.
/
You want to export a field saved on the terminal. The field cannot be saved on the flash drive.
No flash drive is connected or the terminal did not recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.

If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

52008 Caution
/
The field could not be imported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• You removed the flash drive before the action was completed
• The free storage space on the terminal is insufficient

 Repeat the process and leave the flash drive plugged in until the process has completed.

52009 Caution
/
The field could not be loaded.
/
Unknown cause.
 Import the field again.

52010 Warning

Automatic mode Section Control has been deactivated. The GPS accuracy is insufficient.
/
Section Control requires a GPS signal of accuracy class DGPS or better if it is to perform loca-
tion-based section switching. Atmospheric interference and shadowing can result in failures of
the DGPS.

1. Check the symbol in the status bar ( Chapter 3.3).

→ Three green dots must be displayed for Section Control.
→ Using EGNOS or WAAS correction, "DGPS" is indicated by 3 green dots, next to RTK cor-
rection "RTK fix" or "RTK float".
2. Wait until the signal is available with the required accuracy.
3. Switch automatic mode on.

323 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52011 Warning
/
Automatic mode Section Control could not be activated. The GPS accuracy is insufficient.
/
 Warning 52010

1. Wait until the GPS signal is available with the required accuracy.
2. Repeat the process.

52012 Warning
/
Stop the vehicle to change the calibration or reference point.
/
The reference point can only be set if the vehicle is at a complete standstill.

52013 Caution
/
Do you want to change the calibration?
/
Confirmation query.
You want to change the calibration of the reference point.
 To change the calibration, confirm the query with "OK".
→ The position of the tractor is saved as a reference point. The existing reference point is
overwritten.
 To retain the existing reference point, confirm the query with "Cancel".

52014 Caution
/
The existing reference point will be replaced by the new reference point.
/
Confirmation query.
You want to add a reference point, although a reference point already exists.
 To change the calibration, confirm the query with "OK".
→ The existing reference point is overwritten.
 To retain the existing reference point, confirm the query with "Cancel".

52015 Warning
/
There is no flash drive plugged in.
/
The selected function requires a flash drive. No flash drive is connected or the terminal did not
recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.
If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:
 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.
If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

324 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52016 Caution
/
Section Control is more accurate with DGPS than with GPS.
Do you want to allow GPS for Section Control?
/
Confirmation query.
You have set GPS as the Minimum GPS signal quality in the Section Control Settings.
 To set the GPS accuracy to GPS, confirm the query with "OK".
 To retain the set GPS accuracy, confirm the query with "Cancel".

 Only change the pre-setting for "Minimum GPS accuracy" if DGPS is not available.

52017 Caution
/
The worked area is too large. Long loading times or section control errors may occur. Do you
want to delete the worked area?
/
The message is most frequently displayed if you have worked for too long with the AUTOLOG
task, without deleting the worked area. So much data is saved in the task, that further working
takes place in a delayed manner.
 Delete the worked area ( Chapter 9.7.1).

52018 Caution
/
Recording could not be started. The GPS accuracy is insufficient.
/
 Confirm the query with "OK".

The GPS accuracy is insufficient for recording of location-based data. You may possibly be in an
area with a high degree of shading.

1. Check the symbol in the status bar ( Chapter 3.3).

→ Three green dots must be displayed for Section Control.
→ Using EGNOS or WAAS correction, "DGPS" is indicated by 3 green dots, next to RTK cor-
rection "RTK fix" or "RTK float".
2. Wait until the signal is available with the required accuracy.
3. Start the recording.

52019 Caution
/
Section Control not possible. The implement cannot have more than four booms. Reconfigure
the implement.
/
Section Control only supports implements with up to four booms.
 Change the implement configuration.

325 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52020 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 2: GPS accuracy is insufficient.
/
The position data is missing or erroneous. The automatic steering system requires a GPS signal
with DGPS accuracy or better. Atmospheric interference and shadowing can result in failures of
the DGPS.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.
→ You must steer the vehicle.

1. Check the symbol in the status bar ( Chapter 3.3).

→ Three green dots must be displayed for automatic steering.
→ Using EGNOS or WAAS correction, "DGPS" is indicated by 3 green dots, next to RTK cor-
rection "RTK fix" or "RTK float".
2. Wait until the signal is available with the required accuracy.
3. Switch automatic steering on.

52021 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 3: No or erroneous GPS data.
/
The GPS data does not contain or contains erroneous direction information.
→ Automatic steering has been deactivated.
→ You must steer the vehicle.

 Wait for a short time and then turn the automatic steering back on.

52022 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 5: Vehicle stationary for too long.
/
The vehicle has been stationary for too long.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

 Switch automatic steering on after start-up.

52023 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 7: Maximum permitted speed exceeded.
/
The vehicle is travelling too quickly.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Reduce the speed.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

326 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52024 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 9: Inconsistent GPS position data.
/
The position data or the guidance track differ by more than 0.8m from the location of the vehi-
cle. Automatic steering cannot correct this deviation.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Steer the vehicle in the direction of the guidance track.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

52025 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 10: The driven curve is too tight.
/
The automatic steering cannot follow the curvature of the guidance track, e.g. in the event of a
turn whose radius is too small.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Steer the vehicle until the guide track is a straight line.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

52026 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 12: The vehicle cannot follow the specified lane.
/
Automatic steering cannot follow this guidance track.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Steer the vehicle in the direction of the guidance track.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

52027 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 21: Too far from track.
/
The vehicle is more than half an implement’s width from the track.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Steer the vehicle in the direction of the guidance track.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

52028 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 32: Too far from track.
/
The vehicle is more than half an implement’s width from the track.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Steer the vehicle in the direction of the guidance track.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

327 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52029 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 82: No driver in the driver's seat.
/
Automatic steering without control by the driver is not permitted.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Sit in the driver's seat.

2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of the guidance track.
3. Switch automatic steering on.

52030 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 85: Four-wheel steering mode is not available.
/
Four-wheel steering mode is not available on your vehicle.
→ Automatic steering cannot be used.

52031 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 86: Maximum permitted speed in four-wheel steering mode is 20 km/h.
/
The vehicle is travelling too quickly for the selected steering mode.
→ Automatic steering cannot be used.

1. Reduce your speed to less than 20 km/h.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

52032 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 87: Minimum permitted speed in four-wheel steering mode is 5 km/h.
/
The vehicle is travelling too slowly for the selected steering mode.
→ Automatic steering is switched off.

1. Increase your speed to more than 5 km/h.

2. Switch automatic steering on.

52033 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 88: Steering mode cannot be changed when Auto Guidance is activated.
/
Generally, vehicles with four-wheel steering can be switched to front or rear wheel steering.
Nevertheless, the steering mode must not be changed while automatic steering is activated.
→ Automatic steering cannot be used.

1. Switch automatic steering off.

2. Change to the desired steering mode.
3. Switch automatic steering on.

328 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52034 Warning
/
Auto Guidance has been deactivated.
Error 89: Four-wheel steering mode is not available.
/
Four-wheel steering mode is not available on your vehicle.
→ Automatic steering cannot be used.

52035 Warning

Automatic mode Section Control is deactivating. Too few NMEA records per time unit.
/
Section Control has minimum GPS accuracy requirements for performing location-based section
switching ( Appendix E). The connected GPS receiver does not comply with this or is set incor-
rectly.
 Adjust the GPS receiver as described in Appendix E.

52036 Warning
/
Automatic mode Section Control cannot be activated. Too few NMEA records per time unit.
/
Warning 52035

52037 Warning

Automatic mode Section Control is deactivating. Distance C of the tractor is not set.
/
Distance C must be entered in the tractor settings for the mounting type of the currently con-
nected implement in order that location-based section switching can be performed.
 Set up distance C ( Chapter 6.4.2).

52038 Warning
/
Automatic mode Section Control cannot be activated. Distance C of the tractor is not set.
/
 Warning 52037

52039 Warning
/
The headland cannot be created.
Change the selection and try again.
/
Your selection leads to an error in calculating the headland.
 Repeat the process for another selection.

329 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

52040 Warning
/
The field boundary cannot be calculated.
The running task probably contains several worked areas within a distance of more than 10km.
/
The field boundary you want to calculate has a side length of more than 10 km.
This can happen if you have recorded two worked areas (for example, if the implement has been
switched on at the farm and then on the field).
 Delete the worked area and repeat the process.
→ However, this also deletes all previously documented totals and location-based data.

 Alternatively, continue processing the task without a field boundary.

52041 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the implement?
/
Confirmation query.
 To delete the implement, confirm the query with "OK".
→ The implement and implement settings are deleted from the terminal.
→ If you want to use the implement again, the implement must be set again.
 To retain the implement, confirm the query with "Cancel".

54001 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the implement?
/
Confirmation query.
If you confirm the message with "OK", the implement is deleted from the terminal.
 To delete the implement, confirm the query with "OK".
→ The implement and implement settings are deleted from the terminal.
→ If you want to use the implement again, the implement must be set again.
 To retain the implement, confirm the query with "Cancel".

54002 Caution
/
Do you want to delete the tractor?
/
Confirmation query.
If you confirm the message with "OK", the tractor and tractor settings are deleted from the ter-
minal. The settings must be re-entered.
 To delete the tractor, confirm the query with "OK".
→ The tractor and tractor settings are deleted from the terminal.
→ If you want to use the tractor again, the tractor must be set again.
 To retain the tractor, confirm the query with "Cancel".

330 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

54003 Warning
/
The entered value <x>is not in the permissible range from 0 ... <x1>.
/
The entered value is outside the permitted range.
 Enter a valid value.

54004 Warning
/
The entered value <x>is not in the permissible range from <x1> ... <x2>.
/
The entered value is outside the permitted range.
 Enter a valid value.

54005 Warning
/
The entered value <x>is not in the permissible range from <x1> ... <x2>.
/
The entered value is outside the permitted range.
 Enter a valid value.

54006 Caution
/
TECU will be restarted to activate Power Management.
/
To switch on Power Management, TECU must be restarted.
→ The connection of the TECU to ISOBUS is interrupted for the duration of the app restart.

54007 Caution
/
TECU will be restarted to deactivate Power Management.
/
To switch off Power Management, TECU must be restarted.
→ The connection of the TECU to ISOBUS is interrupted for the duration of the app restart.

54012 Warning
/
There is no flash drive plugged in.
/
The selected function requires a flash drive. No flash drive is connected or the terminal did not
recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.

If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

331 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

54013 Warning
/
Importing of the GPS track has failed.
/
The free space on the terminal is insufficient.
→ The GPS track cannot be copied to internal memory.

54014 Warning
/
Exporting of the GPS track has failed. Check that a flash drive is connected.
/
You want to export the GPS track saved on the terminal. The GPS track cannot be saved on the
flash drive. No flash drive is connected or the terminal did not recognise the flash drive.
→ The terminal has recognised the flash drive if the notification "Flash drive is connected" is
displayed.

If you have not connected a flash drive to the terminal:

 Connect a flash drive.
If you have already connected a flash drive to the terminal:
 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.
If the terminal does not recognise the flash drive in spite of the renewed connection:
 Use a different flash drive or a different USB port on the terminal.

54018 Warning
/
No GPS track has been recorded yet.
/
You have pressed the "Export" button in the "GPS simulation" operating screen. However, no
GPS track is yet available on the terminal that could be exported.
 Record a GPS track using "Record GPS track NMEA 0183" ( Chapter 6.10.10).

54019 Warning
/
The GPS receiver was not recognised. Check the GPS settings.
/
The GPS receiver set in the terminal is not the connected GPS receiver.
 Select the correct GPS receiver.

The set GPS receiver and the connected GPS receiver are identical. Presumably then the settings
in the terminal and GPS receiver are incompatible.
 Check the settings of the GPS receiver and adjust the terminal settings.

54020 Warning
/
The GPS receiver has not saved the changes.
1. Ensure that the correct GPS receiver is selected.
2. Repeat entry of the settings.
/
 Proceed as described in the error message.

332 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

54021 Caution
/
The GPS connection will be lost when adjusting the GPS receiver.
/
To reset the GPS receiver, the connection to the receiver must be briefly interrupted.
→ The terminal will not receive any position data for the duration of the interruption.

54022 Warning
/
Invalid entry. Select 2 PRNs or switch to AUTO mode.
/
 In the "SPAS" operating screen, select at least two PRNs or switch on AUTO mode.

54024 Warning
/
The tractors and implements could not be exported. Connect a flash drive with enough free
space and repeat the process.
/
You want to export the implement and tractor settings. The settings cannot be saved on the
flash drive.

Ensure that:
• The flash drive is functioning
• The write-protection switch of the flash drive is in the "off" position
• The flash drive has at least 100 kB of free storage

54026 Warning
/
Tractors and implements could not be imported.
/
The error can have the following causes:
• The free storage space on the terminal is insufficient
• The file DEVICEDATA.XML on the flash drive has an incorrect format

54027 Caution
/
Only one GPS track can be stored. The current GPS track will be overwritten.
/
Confirmation query. You want to record a GPS track. Recording overwrites the GPS track already
saved on the terminal.
 To Start the recording, confirm the query with "OK".

54028 Caution
/
Only one GPS track can be stored. The current GPS track will be overwritten.
/
Confirmation query. You are importing a GPS track from the flash drive. The import will over-
write the GPS track already saved on the terminal.

 To save the new GPS track on the terminal, confirm the query with "OK".

333 / 366
 11 Troubleshooting

Error num- Type/Message text/Remedy

ber

54029 Warning
/
The entered value %2 is too small.
Enter %1 or greater.
/
 Enter a new value.

54030 Warning
/
SMART2 cannot be activated.
Invalid licence key or no connection to a satellite.
/
The Novatel SMART2 GPS receiver cannot be selected. Either the entered licence key (Novatel
activation code) is incorrect or the SMART2 cannot connect to a satellite.
 Enter a valid licence key.
 Drive to a location where a connection to a satellite can be established.

56000 Caution
/
The terminal is not connected with the ISOBUS. Control of the camera by the implement is not
possible.
/
Some ISOBUS implements can use/control the camera connected at the terminal. Both terminal
and implement must be connected with the ISOBUS.

1. Restart the terminal.

2. Disconnect the implement form the ISOBUS and wait 5 seconds.
3. Reconnect the implement to the ISOBUS.

60000 Warning
/
There is no Updater app on the flash drive. The ECU update cannot be performed.
/
You require the manufacturer’s specific updater app. This app is not available on the flash drive.
 Connect a flash drive containing the updater app to the terminal.

60001 Warning
/
The update application could not be loaded. Reconnect the flash drive and try again.
/
The manufacturer’s updater app has found the update for the ECU. However, the update cannot
be loaded. It is possible that the connection to the flash drive has been lost.
 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

60002 Warning
/
The update application could not be loaded. Reconnect the flash drive and try again.
/
The manufacturer’s updater app has found the update for the ECU. However, the update cannot
be loaded. It is possible that the connection to the flash drive has been lost.
 Pull out the flash drive and plug it back in.

334 / 366
 12 Glossary

12 Glossary

agrirouter A data exchange platform for farmers and contractors, with which implements and
agricultural software can be connected independent of the software developer.
agrirouter transports data but does not store it.

Application map Section-specific setpoint map on which the quantity of product to be applied for
each section in a field is specified, e.g. in the case of fertilising.
The terminal processes it according to the position on the field during work.
Usually during the planning of application maps, in addition to the yield maps, lots
of other information is entered such as weather information, results of the variety
tests as well as the results of the location analysis such as soil tests, soil maps or
aerial views.

Auto Guidance Software for setting up the automatic steering system.

On self-propelled implements with the steering computer ECU-S1 installed, use
the terminal's Auto Guidance app to set up the automatic steering system.
You can find more detailed information on automatic steering in the instruction
manual for your self-propelled implement.

AUX control Also: AUX-Control.

Typical AUX controls are joysticks or toggle switch strips.
An AUX control enables the comfortable and efficient operation of frequently used
implement functions.

AUX Control AUX control, see also AUX control

Baud rate Unit with which the speed of data transfer over the serial interface is measured.

Burger menu Navigation element of the graphical user interface.

You can access all functions and settings not directly available on the screen via
the burger menu.

Button Operating element in the operating screen that is activated by pressing the
touchscreen.

CAN Controller Area Network

CCI Competence Center ISOBUS e.V.

COG Course over ground

Coupling Female connector on the end of a cable.

Coupling point The point on the implement to which the tractor is coupled.

Crop type Types or species of a crop such as corn or barley

Crop variety Special sort or breed of a crop type.

Customer Every field can be assigned to a customer. This is the person for whom an task is
being performed in this field.

335 / 366
 12 Glossary

Delay time The delay time specifies the time delay between the command and the actual acti-
vation of a section (e.g. during spraying, the time from the command"Switch on
section", until the time when the agent is actually applied).

ECU Electronic Control Unit

Control unit, task computer

EHR Electronic Lift Control

FMIS Farm Management Information System

Also: FMIS
Software for yield data processing and the creation of application maps.

GPS Global Positioning System

Satellite-based system for position determination.

GPS drift Due to the Earth's rotation and the changing position of the satellites in the sky,
the calculated position of a point moves. This is referred to as GPS drift.

Ground speed sensor It emits a specific number of electrical pulses in proportion to the distance already
covered. As such, the real, slip-free speed, the ground speed, can be calculated.
Note that under certain circumstances, ground speed sensors may supply inaccu-
rate speed values depending on the surface, for example, high grass or puddles.

GUI Graphical User Interface

The purpose of the graphical user interface is to ensure apps and ISOBUS imple-
ments can be operated on the terminal using graphical symbols. The GUI com-
prises all Operating screens of an app or implement.

Guidance track Track created in parallel to the reference track, which is used as an orientation
aide for correct adjoining parallel driving

Headland The area at the edge of a field used during working of the land.

Implement Towed or attached implement. An implement with which a task can be executed.

In-cab Term from the standard ISO 11783. Describes the nine-pole ISOBUS panel con-
nector in the tractor cab.

Input dialogue Element of the graphical user interface.

Enables the input or selection of values.

Interface Part of the terminal which is used to communicate with other devices.

ISB ISOBUS Shortcut Button

In theory, the ISB should enable implements to be put into a defined state with a
single command without having to switch off the active implement functions indi-
vidually in CCI.UT.
This can, for example, be necessary if you need to react quickly to an emergency
situation or if CCI.UT is not currently displayed in the standard view and the im-
plement is therefore not operable.
The ISB sends a higher priority message to the ISOBUS. This message can be
evaluated by the connected ISOBUS implements. The implement can initiate ap-
propriate automatic operations in response to this message, e.g., to adapt a safe
state.

336 / 366
 12 Glossary

ISOBUS ISO 11783

International standard for data transfer between farming implements and devices.

ISOBUS participant A device that is connected over the ISOBUS and communicates via this system.

ISO-XML ISOBUS-specific format for task data files based on XML.

LAN Local Area Network

A LAN network is usually taken to mean the entire network of a building or a
house.

Location-based Implement data and yield data such as hoisting gear version, bale length, section
data or application rate per hectare. This data is recorded and saved together with the
current GPS position.

Master data Products, farms, customer or field data managed in the terminal or FMIS that can
be assigned to a field or task.

Miniplexer Device for switching between video signals which facilitates operating of two cam-
eras via one video input (similar to a multiplexer, but with limited functions).

Multiplexer Device for switching between video signals which facilitates operating multiple
cameras over one video input.

myCCI Internet portal of the CCI with a wide range of functions.

On the PC open the web site https://mycci.cc-isobus.com/ .

The portal offers the following functions:

• Download the instruction manual for the device.
• Enter the number of an error message
→ An explanation of the cause of the error and troubleshooting tips are dis-
played (where possible).
• Update the licence data of your terminal.
• Enter the serial number of your device.
→ Device information is displayed.

NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183 is a standard for communication between GPS receiver and terminal.
It comprises a serial interface and data records in a standardised format.

NMEA 2000 NMEA 2000 is a CAN based network for data transfer that is primarily used in
shipping. In land-based technology NMEA 2000 is used for communication be-
tween GPS receivers and terminals via ISOBUS.

337 / 366
 12 Glossary

Object Pool A term taken from the ISOBUS standard ISO 11783.
All operating screens of an ISOBUS implement are combined in the Object Pool.
The operating screens consist of display and operating elements:
• Text and pictograms
• Buttons
• Input fields
• Selection lists etc.
These display and operating elements are displayed on the terminal for implement
operation.
The Object Pool is sent to the ISOBUS terminal by the implement the first time the
implement is connected to the terminal. The terminal saves the Object Pool.

Operating screen The part of the graphical user interface (GUI) of an app or an ISOBUS implement
visible on the display.
The operating screen comprises the indication and operating elements shown on
the display. The indication elements provide information and the operating ele-
ments can be selected directly via the touchscreen.

Operation Crop cultivation operation

The action performed on a field such as tillage or fertilising.

Overlap Double treatment

Panel connector Male connector permanently integrated in a device casing.

Parallel Tracking Parallel driving aide

Parallel Tracking indicates, taking into account the current working width and posi-
tion, parallel tracks and the current deviation from the track and suggests neces-
sary steering corrections via a lightbar or similar. Amongst others, the tracks can
be recorded as straight A-B lines or as curves.
The parallel driving aide,, enables exact parallel driving on fields without tram-
lines, e.g. for crop spraying and fertilizer application.
→ Overlaps and missed areas are avoided.

PDF Portable Document Format

File format for documents

Plug Male connector on the end of a cable.

Product A product is applied to or removed from a field as part of an operation, e.g. ferti-
liser, pesticide or harvested product.

PTO sensor Measures the speed of the power take off.

It emits a specific number of electrical pulses in proportion to the power take off
speed.

Rate Control Section-specific application

For variable application rates based on application maps. The terminal imports ap-
plication maps in shape or ISO-XML format. The application rate can be specified
as mass, volume, distance or percent.
2 Control Points allow different application rates on the left and right side of the
implement. Prerequisite for this is an implement that supports this function.

338 / 366
 12 Glossary

Rear 3-point hitch Hydraulic device on tractors for coupling up and raising attachable devices (work-
ing devices).
Also: 3-point, rear 3-point hitch or rear hoisting gear.

Reference track Track recorded by the driver, that is used for the calculation of other lead tracks
created in parallel for track guidance.

Screenshot Capture and saving of the display content in a file.

Section Using yield maps and other methods of location analysis such as ground or con-
tour maps, aerial photographs or multi-spectral images, it is possible, based on in-
dividual experience, to define zones within the field, if these significantly differ
over periods of four to five years.
If these zones have a sufficient size and, for example with winter wheat a differ-
ence in yield potential of approximately 1.5 t/ha, it makes sense to , match the
cultivation and operations in these zones to the yield potential.
Such areas are then designated as sections.

Section Control Automatic Section Control

Using GPS, Section Control automatically switches off the sections of an ISOBUS
implement upon passing over field boundaries and already treated areas and
switches them back on upon leaving them. Possible overlaps are thus reduced to a
minimum and the driver's work load reduced. Section Control can be used with
ISOBUS implements that support this function.

Section-specific Satellite support use of an application map.

working See above. Rate Control

Seed skip % Missed areas are the result of omissions.

Signal connector Seven pole socket based on the ISO 11786 standard, at which signals for speed,
PTO speed and position of the rear 3-point hitch can be read.

Socket Female connector permanently integrated in a device casing.

SOG Speed over ground

Steering computer Part of an automatic steering system or steering assist system.

The position data of the GPS receiver is passed to the steering computer, which
implements the set parameters and forwards the corresponding steering com-
mands to the steering wheel motor or to the steering hydraulics.

TAN Transaction number:

A single-use password that you need to obtain new licence data.

Task Controller An ISOBUS function.

The Task Controller undertakes the documenting of totals and location-based
data, which are made available by the implement.

339 / 366
 12 Glossary

Task set A task set is a collection of multiple tasks.

There must not be any connection between the individual tasks of a task set. All
task sets access the same master data.

TC client Task Controller Client

The part of the implement software that connects with the Task Controller on the
terminal. The implement requires a TC client for documentation, Section Control
and Rate Control.

TECU Tractor ECU

On an ISOBUS tractor, the TECU establishes the connection between the tractor
bus system and the ISOBUS. The tractor sends its tractor data to all ISOBUS par-
ticipants:
• Ground and wheel speed
• Power take off speed
• Direction of travel
• Position of the rear 3-point hitch

Terminal The CCI 800/CCI 1200 terminal

Terminal functions Frequently used terminal functions that can be accessed with an AUX control.

Totals Totals of countable implement data such as number of bales, total consumption or
total application rate.

Touchscreen Touch-sensitive display for operation of the terminal.

Tramline Control Function for automatic switching of the tramlines via GPS.
This function can be used when driving in beds during sowing, laying or planting.
The tramlines are precisely laid out.

URL Uniform Resource Locator

A standard used for website addressing in the World Wide Web; the Internet ad-
dress.

USB Universal Serial Bus:

Serial bus system to connect the terminal to a storage medium.

UT The Universal Terminal is the human machine interface (HMI) of ISOBUS. This is
the display and operating device.
Each implement connected to the ISOBUS logs on to the UT and uploads its Object
Pool. You operate the implement via the operating screens of the Object Pool.

UT client Universal Terminal Client

The part of the implement software that connects with the Universal Terminal on
the terminal. Used for implement operation.

340 / 366
 12 Glossary

Wheel speed sensor It emits a specific number of electrical signals in proportion to the wheel rotation.
As such, the theoretical slip-including speed of the tractor, the wheel speed, can
be calculated.
Wheel based speed sensors may supply inaccurate speed values when slip occurs.

WiFi Wireless Local Area Network

Wireless or WiFi network

Work position Position of the rear 3-point hitch (and thus the attached implement) can be edited
in the field.

XML Extended Markup Language

Logical markup language and both successor and enhancement of HTML. XML per-
mits the specification of its own language elements so that other markup lan-
guages such as HTML or WML can be defined by using XML.

341 / 366
 13 Disposal

13 Disposal
Dispose of a defective or no longer used terminal with due care for the envi-
ronment:
• Dispose of the device parts in an environmentally friendly manner.
• Observe the local regulations.

Plastics Dispose of plastics with normal domestic waste or according to the local regu-
lations.

Metal Enter metal into a metal recycling chain.

PCBs Deliver the terminal PCBs to a specialist recycling company.

342 / 366
 14 Index

14 Index

A Eth, pin assignment ................................... 353

Action Button .........................................25 D

Aerial height...........................................87
Delay times ......................................... 108
agrirouter ........................................ 56–61
Device holder ........................................... 6
Analogue camera
Digital camera
connecting, one .......................................... 64
connecting ................................................. 67
connecting, two .......................................... 65
Display areas ......................................... 17
connecting, up to eight ................................ 66
Distance A
Apps
set ............................................................ 85
switch on and off......................................... 32
Distance B
Auto Guidance
set ............................................................ 86
Operating elements ................................... 249
Distance C
Requirements ........................................... 236
set ............................................................ 87
set .......................................................... 236
why set ...................................................... 88
Use disabled ...................................... 250, 251
Distance D ........................................... 106
Automatic steering system See Auto Guidance
set ................................ See Set up implement
AUX control ........................ See AUX control
Distance D2 ......................................... 122
assigning implement function ..................... 167
set ...................... See Second implement setup
assigning terminal function ......................... 172
Check assignment ..................................... 170 F
connecting ............................................... 153
File Server
Delete assignment..................................... 175
ISOBUS function ......................................... 41
requires UT number 1 ................................ 157
AUX Control ....................... See AUX control G
B GPS
Accuracy requirements............................... 128
Backup ..................................................50
set .......................................................... 127
Burger button .........................................25
GPS aerial
Buttons
Set distance A ............................................ 85
In the status bar ......................................... 23
Set distance B ............................................ 86
special ....................................................... 25
Set distance C ............................................ 88
C Set position ................................................ 85
GPS settings
Calibrate ground speed ............................95
A101, AgStar ............................................ 132
Calibrate rear 3-point hitch ......................96
Position of the aerial .................................. 129
Calibrate wheel speed..............................94
Serial interface ......................................... 131
Camera Image
Source ..................................................... 130
mirror ........................................................ 69
GPS source .......................................... 130
show continuously ....................................... 72
Ground speed
switch automatically .................................... 75
set ......................... See set up signal connector
switching with AUX ...................................... 77
CCI 1200 H
About ......................................................... iii
Help...................................................... 14
CCI.OS
Help final
update ....................................................... 46
Import ....................................................... 32
Connector
3 and 4, pin assignment ............................. 353 I
A, B and C ................................................... ix
Ignition key ........................................... vii
A, pin assignment ..................................... 350
Implement
B, pin assignment ..................................... 351
Delete...................................................... 146
C, pin assignment ..................................... 352
new ......................................................... 100

343 / 366
 14 Index

select ...................................................... 143 Self-propelled implement See implement type

set .......................................................... 102 Set up signal connector
Shifting to another UT................................ 180 Ground speed ....................................... 92, 95
Software update ....................................... 178 Power take off ............................................ 93
switch ...................................................... 101 Rear 3-point hitch ....................................... 96
Implement type .................................... 104 Wheel speed ......................................... 92, 94
Initial set-up ...... See setting up for operation Work position ............................................. 97
Internet .................................................53 X-Sensor .................................................... 93
ISOBUS Set up tractor
Functions ................................................... 33 GPS speed .................................................. 83
Implement mounting type ............................ 87
L
Set working position ............................... 97
Layout Setting up for operation ...................... 5–12
Maxi .......................................................... 15 Set-up Implement
Maxi Portrait ............................................... 15 Distance D ............................................... 106
Portrait Standard ........................................ 15 Implement type ........................................ 104
Standard .................................................... 15 Mounting type........................................... 105
Licence Section geometry ...................................... 107
update ....................................................... 52 Working width .......................................... 104
Light sensor ........................................... vii Shape application map
Format..................................................... 193
M
Import ..................................................... 191
Messages Setpoint table ........................................... 193
blue ........................................................... 26 Shape field boundary
Mounting type ......................... 87, 105, 121 Import ..................................................... 194
Signal connector
N
switch off ................................................... 89
Nameplate ............................................ viii switch on ................................................... 91
Notes Software version
Note types ...................................................1 show ......................................................... 42

O T
Object Pool .......................................... 154 Tacho ................................................. 137
ON/OFF button Task Controller
LED ........................................................... vii ISOBUS function ......................................... 37
LED, flashing signals .................................. 284 Number ..................................................... 38
TC client .................................................. 101
P
TECU
Pin assignment ...................... See connector ISOBUS function ......................................... 40
Power Management .................................99 Terminal
Power take off speed fit 6
set ......................... See set up signal connector Show serial number ..................................... 42
switch on, off .............................................. vii
R
Terminal function
Remote maintenance ....................... 43, 291 operating with AUX.................................... 172
Remote View .................................. 43, 291 Terminal functions
activation ................................................... 36
S
Tilt sensor ........................................... 133
Safety notes ............................................ 2 Time zone
Scope of delivery ..................................... 5 Overview.................................................. 365
Screen brightness select...........................................................9
change....................................................... 27 Touch gestures
Screenshot supported are ............................................. 13
recording ................................................. 290 Tractor
Second implement setup Delete...................................................... 142
Distance D ............................................... 122 new ........................................................... 80
Mounting type........................................... 121 select....................................................... 140

344 / 366
 14 Index

set ............................................................ 81 Mini view .................................................... 21

Signal connector ................................... 89, 91 Standard view............................................. 20
switch .................................................80, 140 Status bar .................................................. 18
with TECU .................................................. 89 UT ........................... See Universal Terminal
without TECU .............................................. 91 UT number .......................................... 157
Tractor data ...........................................89 for AUX control ......................................... 157
Trailed implement .......... See implement type
W
Turn off delay ...................... See delay times
Turn on delay ...................... See delay times Wheel speed
set ......................... See set up signal connector
U
Working width
Universal Terminal ................................ 151 set ................................ See Set up implement
UT client .................................................. 101
X
User interface
App menu .................................................. 20 X-Sensor ............................................... 93
Implement .............................. See Object Pool

345 / 366
 A Technical data

CCI 1200 CCI 800

Dimensions (B x H x D) 312 x 213 x 66 226 x 151 x 55

[mm]

Casing Type Glass fibre reinforced Glass fibre reinforced

polyamide polyamide

Fastening VESA75 VESA75

Operating Temperature [°C] -15 - +70 -30 - +70

Supply voltage [V] 12 VDC or 24VDC 12 VDC or 24VDC

Permitted Range [V] 7.5 VDC - 32VDC 7.5 VDC - 32VDC

Power consumption (at 12V) 17, typical 12, typical

[W] 143, maximum 83, maximum

Display [inch] 12.1 TFT 8 TFT

Display resolution [px] WXGA, 1280 x 800 WSVGA, 1024 x 600

Colour depth 24 bit 24 bit

Buzzer 85 dBA 85 dBA

Storage temperature [°C] -30 - +80 -30 - +80

Weight [gr] 2000 1100

Protection class IP65 IP65

EMC ISO 14982 ISO 14982:2009

ESD protection ISO 10605:2008 ISO 10605:2008

346 / 366
B Interfaces

CAUTION!

Do not connect or disconnect cable during live operations.

Connection or disconnection of a cable during live operation can cause an
overvoltage at the terminal or a peripheral.
Overvoltages can destroy the electronics of the terminal or peripherals.
Switch the terminal off before connecting or disconnecting connector A, B
or C.

CAUTION!

Plugs and sockets with dissimilar coding must not be connected.

The connecting together of connectors with dissimilar coding will result in
damage to socket or plug.

All terminal connectors are mechanically protected to prevent incorrect con-

nection or interchanging.
Ensure that plugs and sockets have the same coding.
Do not apply excessive force when connecting plug and socket.

CAUTION!

Panel connectors with bent contacts must not be used.

If a pin becomes bent, the connection no longer functions reliably.
Every time the connector is plugged in again, the contact pin bends further.
Submit the device for repair.

347 / 366
 NOTE

Seal off unused connectors.

If a connector is not sealed, dust or moisture can get into the terminal.
Seal off unused connectors with blanking caps.

CCI 800

348 / 366
CCI 1200

349 / 366
 B.1 Connector A

Connector type
Panel connector German DT, 12 pole, A-
coded

Function
• CAN1
• CAN2
• ECU power
• Power supply

Use
ISOBUS, switched ECU supply

Pin Signal Comment

1 V+ in Supply voltage,
12VDC or 24VDC
2 ECU Power enable Switched ECU supply voltage
3 Power enable Switched supply voltage
4 CAN_H CAN1 High
5 CAN_L CAN1 Low
6 CAN_GND CAN 1 earth
7 CAN_H CAN2 High
8 CAN_L CAN2 Low
9 CAN_GND CAN2 earth
10 Key Switch State Ignition signal
11 Shield Shielding
12 GND Mass

350 / 366
 B.2 Connector B

Connector type
Panel connector German DT, 12 pole, B-
coded

Function
• RS232
• ISO 11786

Use
Signal connector, GPS/LH5000/ADS/TUVR

Pin Signal Comment

1 V+ out 12VDC or 24VDC
2 ISO 11786, Ground based speed Ground speed sensor
3 ISO 11786, Wheel based speed Wheel speed sensor
4 ISO 11786, PTO speed Power take off speed
5 ISO 11786, In/out of work Working position of the 3-point hitch
6 ISO 11786, Linkage position Position of the rear 3-point hitch
7 Key Switch State Ignition signal
8 GND Mass
9 Direction signal Direction of travel
10 RS232 TxD RS232-1
11 RS232 RxD RS232-1
12 GND Mass

351 / 366
 B.3 Connector C

Connector type
Panel connector German DT, 12 pole, C-
coded

Function
• RS232
• RS485
• Video

Use
Camera, Video-Miniplexer, Video-Multi-
plexer, GPS/LH5000/ADS/TUVR

Pin Signal Comment

1 V+ out Camera power supply
2 Video IN
3 Video GND Mass
4 RS485B
5 RS485A
6 V+ out Supply voltage
Video-Miniplexer or Video-Multiplexer
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
9 RS232, V+ out Supply voltage RS232
10 RS232, TxD RS232-2
11 RS232, RxD RS232-2
12 RS232, GND Mass

352 / 366
 B.4 Connector 3 and 4

Connector type
Socket M12, 5-pole, A-coded

Function
• USB 2.0

Use
Flash drive, W10 WiFi adapter

Pin Signal Comment

1 V+ Supply voltage
2 D- Data -
3 D+ Data +
4 GND Mass
5 GND Mass

B.5 Connector Eth

Connector type
Socket M12, 8-pole, X-coded

Function
• Ethernet

Use
LAN

Pin Signal Comment

1 TR0+
2 TR0-
3 TR1+
4 TR1-
5 TR3+
6 TR3-
7 TR2+
8 TR2-

353 / 366
 C Cables

NOTE

Where possible only use the original cable to connect the terminal.
You can order this from the manufacturer or its approved dealers.

Identifier:
Cable A

Length:
150 cm

"InCab":
Coupling, 9-pole
→ In-cab panel connector in the tractor

"A":
Coupling, 12-pole
→ Connector A on the terminal

Use:
Connect terminal to the power supply and
ISOBUS

InCab
#1: V+ in
#2: CAN_L IN
#3: CAN_L OUT
#4: CAN_H IN
#5: CAN_H OUT
#6: -
#7: V+ in
#8: -
#9: GND

354 / 366
 Identifier:
Cable B

Length:
30 cm

"Signal":
Coupling M12, 12-pole
→ Cable H "Signal"

"B":
Coupling, 12-pole
→ Connector B on the terminal

"RS232":
Plug M8, 4-pole
→ GPS receiver, sensor

Use:
• Connect terminal to signal connector
• Connect a GPS receiver or sensor
with a serial interface to the terminal

Signal RS232
#1: - #1: V+ out
#2: GND #2: RS232 TxD
#3: PTO speed #3: GND
#4: Linkage position #4: RS232 RxD
#5: Wheel based speed
#6: In/out of work
#7: Ground based speed
#8 - #12: -

355 / 366
 Identifier:
Cable C1

Length:
35 cm

"AEF Video":
Plug, 7-pole
→ Camera

"C":
Coupling, 12-pole
→ Connector C on the terminal

"RS232":
Plug M8, 4-pole
→ GPS receiver, sensor

Use:
• Connect terminal to camera
• Connect a GPS receiver or sensor
with a serial interface to the terminal

AEF-Video RS232
#1: V+ out #1: V+ out
#2: V+ out #2: RS232 TxD
#3: Video GND #3: GND
#4: Video IN #4: RS232 RxD
#5: -
#6: -
#7: GND

356 / 366
 Identifier:
Cable C2

Length:
30 cm

"Video":
Coupling M12, 8-pole
→ Camera

"C":
Coupling, 12-pole
→ Connector C on the terminal

"RS232":
Plug M8, 4-pole
→ GPS receiver, sensor

Use:
• Connect terminal to camera or to
Video-Miniplexer or Video-Multiplexer
• Connect a GPS receiver or sensor
with a serial interface to the terminal

M12-Video RS232
#1: Video IN #1: V+ out
#2: RS485B #2: RS232 TxD
#3: RS485A #3: GND
#4: V+ out #4: RS232 RxD
#5: V+ out
#6: V+ out
#7: GND
#8: Video GND

357 / 366
 Identifier:
Cable H (also: cable type H)

Length:
200 cm

"":
Plug, 7-pole
→ Signal connector in the tractor

"Signal":
Plug, M12, 12-pole
→ Coupling "Signal" on cable B

Use:
Connect terminal to signal connector

Note:
The ISO 11786-Signal "Work position"
and the "Direction of travel" signal are
not available over cable H

"" Signal
#1: Ground based speed #: -
#2: Wheel based speed #2: GND
#3: PTO speed #3: PTO speed
#4: - #4: Linkage position
#5: Linkage position #5: Wheel based speed
#6: V+ #6: -
#7: GND #7: Ground based speed
#8, #9: -
#10: V+ (Key Switch)
#11,#12: -

358 / 366
 Identifier:
Cable N (also: cable type N)

Length:
200 cm

"NMEA":
Plug D-SUB, 9-pole
→ GPS receiver

"RS232":
Coupling M8, 4-pole
→ Plug "RS232" to cable B or C

Use:
Connecting the terminal to the GPS re-
ceiver

Note:
Power supply to the GPS receiver is not
possible with the cable N

NMEA RS232
#1: - #1: -
#2: RS232 RxD #2: RS232 TxD
#3: RS232 TxD #3: GND
#4: - #4: RS232 RxD
#5: GND
#6 - #9: -

359 / 366
Identifier:
Cable Y

Length:
15 cm

"InCab":
Coupling, 9-pole
→ In-cab panel connector in the tractor

"UT":
Plug, 9-pole
→ Coupling "InCab" on cable A

"AUX":
Plug, 9-pole
→ AUX control

Use:
Connect terminal and AUX control to the
ISOBUS

360 / 366
D Application maps

D.1 ISO-XML
An application map in ISO-XML format may contain any approved DDI in the
Data Dictionary.
Percentage values can be processed.
An ISO-XML file can contain multiple application maps.

Zones • Grid type 1: max. 255

• Grid type 2: no limit
• Polygon: max. 255

Colours Up to 12 colours can be displayed in the legend

Maximum number of • Grid Type 1: 1

application maps • Grid Type 2: ≥1
contained in the • Polygon: 1
ISO-XML file

D.2 Shape
A shape file only contains an application map.

Permitted formats WGS84 projection

PolygonZ

Points Max. 50,000

361 / 366
E GPS receiver
The following receivers comply with standard NMEA 0183 and are connected
to the terminal via the serial interface.
→ We have already saved the settings we recommend for these receivers in
the terminal.

Change the settings of your receiver as follows ( Chapter 6.6.3).

E.1 Hemisphere A100 / A101

SBAS EGNOS active

Baud rate 19200

Data • GGA, VTG and ZDA: 5Hz

• GSA: 1Hz

E.2 Hemisphere A222 / A631

SBAS EGNOS active

Correction service ATLAS active

Baud rate 38400

Data • GGA, VTG: 10Hz

• GSA, ZDA: 5Hz

E.3 Novatel AgStar

SBAS Auto

Baud rate 38400

Data • GGA, RMC and VTG: 10Hz

• GSA, GSV and ZDA: 1Hz

Satellite systems • GPS + SBAS

used • GPS + GLONASS + SBAS
(Northern hemisphere)

Satellite systems • GPS

used • GPS + GLONASS
(Southern hemisphere)

362 / 366
E.4 Novatel SMART2

Baud rate 38400

Data • GGA, RMC and VTG: 10Hz

• GSA, GSV and ZDA: 1Hz

Receivers that send their position data to the terminal via ISOBUS cannot be
set up from the terminal.

Set up these receivers as described in the device's manual.

We recommend the following settings:

E.5 NMEA 2000

PGN PGN Description Repetition rate Abbreviation in
decimal hex CCI.Config

129025 1F801 Position, Rapid Update At least 5Hz, POSR

Recommended 10Hz
129026 1F802 COG and SOG, At least 5Hz, COGR
Rapid Update Recommended 10Hz
129029 1F805 GNSS position data 1Hz POS

Alternatively:
PGN PGN Description Repetition rate Abbreviation in
decimal hex CCI.Config
129027 1F803 Altitude Delta, High At least 5Hz, ALTD
Precision Rapid Update Recommended 10Hz
129028 1F804 Position, High Precision At least 5Hz, POSD
Rapid Update Recommended 10Hz
129029 1F805 GNSS position data 1Hz POS

E.6 SAE J1939

PGN hex Description Repetition rate Abbreviation in
CCI.Config

0xFEF3 Vehicle position 5Hz POS

0xFEE8 Vehicle direction 5Hz VDS

Speed

363 / 366
F AEF functionalities
CCI.OS undergoes the AEF conformance test with each new version.
CCI.OS 4.0 is certified for the following AEF ISOBUS functionalities:

Universal Terminal
So that the terminal can be used to operate different imple-
ments.

Task Controller basic (totals)

For the documentation of totals and data exchange between
FMIS and terminal via ISO-XML files.

Task Controller geo-based (variables)

For the documentation of location-based data and the plan-
ning of location-based tasks.

Task Controller Section Control

For the automatic switching of sections depending on the
GPS position.

Auxiliary Control (new)

For the operation of frequently uses implement functions
with an AUX control.
Here there are "old" and "new" versions that are not com-
patible with each other. AUX controls that are AUX-N certi-
fied cannot be used with terminals that are certified AUX-O
and vice-versa.

Basic Tractor ECU

For the provision of tractor data over the ISOBUS relating to
ground and wheel speed, PTO speed, direction of travel and
position of the rear 3-point hitch.

ISOBUS Shortcut Button

For rapid deactivation of implement functions without ISO-
BUS implement operation.

364 / 366
G Time zones
• (UTC -09:00) Alaska
• (UTC -08:00) Tijuana, Baja California (Mexico)
• (UTC -08:00) Los Angeles, Vancouver
• (UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
• (UTC -07:00) Denver, Salt Lake City, Calgary
• (UTC -07:00) Dawson Creek, Hermosillo, Phoenix
• (UTC -06:00) Costa Rica, Guatemala, Managua
• (UTC -06:00) Chicago, Winnipeg
• (UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
• (UTC -05:00) Havana
• (UTC -05:00) Detroit, New York, Toronto
• (UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama
• (UTC -04:00) Caracas
• (UTC -04:00) Bermuda, Halifax
• (UTC -04:00) Campo Grande, Cuiaba
• (UTC -04:00) Asuncion
• (UTC -04:00) Santiago
• (UTC -03:00) Montevideo
• (UTC -03:00) Sao Paulo
• (UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires, Cordoba
• (UTC -03:00) Mendoza, Recife, San Luis
• (UTC +00:00) Casablanca, Reykjavik
• (UTC +00:00) Dublin, Lisbon, London
• (UTC +01:00) Windhoek
• (UTC +01:00) Algiers, Porto Novo
• (UTC +01:00) Berlin, Oslo, Paris, Rome, Stockholm
• (UTC +01:00) Tunis
• (UTC +02:00) Cairo
• (UTC +02:00) Jerusalem, Tel Aviv
• (UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
• (UTC +02:00) Athens, Helsinki, Istanbul, Riga
• (UTC +02:00) Johannesburg, Tripoli
• (UTC +03:00) Moscow, Volgograd
• (UTC +04:00) Yerevan, Samara
• (UTC +05:00) Yekaterinburg
• (UTC +05:30) Calcutta, Colombo
• (UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
• (UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
• (UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
• (UTC +08:00) Hong Kong, Perth, Singapore
• (UTC +08:00) Irkutsk
• (UTC +08:45) Eucla
• (UTC +09:00) Seoul, Tokyo
• (UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
• (UTC +09:30) Darwin
• (UTC +09:30) Adelaide
• (UTC +10:00) Vladivostok
• (UTC +10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney
• (UTC +11:00) Magadan
• (UTC +12:00) Kamchatka
• (UTC +12:00) Auckland

365 / 366
Copyright
©2023
Competence Center ISOBUS e.V.
Hamburger Straße 24
D-49084 Osnabrück
Document number: 20230201